Subject 3. Other Financial Information Sources
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #introduction
Financial Notes and Supplementary Schedules
Financial footnotes are an integral part of financial statements. They provide information about the accounting methods, assumptions and estimates used by management to develop the data reported in the financial statements. They provide additional disclosure in such areas as fixed assets, inventory methods, income taxes, pensions, debt, contingencies such as lawsuits, sales to related parties, etc. They are designed to allow users to improve assessments of the amounts, timing, and uncertainty of the estimates reported in the financial statements. Supplementary Schedules: In some cases additional information about the assets and liabilities of a company is provided as supplementary data outside the financial statements. Examples include oil and gas reserves reported by oil and gas companies, the impact of changing prices, sales revenue, operating income, and other information for major business segments. Some of the supplementary data is unaudited. Management Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) This requires management to discuss specific issues on the financial statements, and to assess the company's current financial condition, liquidity, and its planned capital expenditure for the next year. An analyst should look for specific concise disclosure as well as consistency with footnote disclosure. Note that the MD&A section is not audited and is for public companies only. Auditor's Reports See next subject for details. Other Sources of Information
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Auditor's Reports
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #introduction
The auditor (an independent certified public accountant) is responsible for seeing that the financial statements issued comply with generally accepted accounting principles. In contrast, the company's management is responsible for the preparation of the financial statements. The auditor must agree that management's choice of accounting principles is appropriate and that any estimates are reasonable. The auditor also examines the company's accounting and internal control systems, confirms assets and liabilities, and generally tries to be sure that there are no material errors in the financial statements.
Though hired by the management, the auditor is supposed to be independent and to serve the stockholders and the other users of the financial statements. An auditor's report (also called the auditor's opinion) is issued as part of a company's audited financial report. It tells the end-user the following:
An auditor's report is considered an essential tool when reporting financial information to end-users, particularly in business. Since many third-party users prefer or even require financial information to be certified by an independent external auditor, many auditees rely on auditor reports to certify their information in order to attract investors, obtain loans, and improve public appearance. Some have even stated that financial information without an auditor's report is "essentially worthless" for investing purposes. The Types of Audit Reports There are four common types of auditor's reports, each one representing a different situation encountered during the auditor's work. The four reports are as follows:
Auditor's Report on In... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Financial Statement Analysis Framework
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #introduction
The financial statement analysis framework provides steps that can be followed in any financial statement analysis project, including the following:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Classification of Business Activities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics
Business activities can be classified into three groups:
In Reading 27 [Understanding the Cash Flow Statement] a more detailed discussion of different business activities and their impact on cash flows will be provided. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Financial Statement Elements and Accounts
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics
An account is a label used for recording and reporting a quantity of almost anything. It is the:
A chart of accounts is a list of all accounts tracked by a single accounting system, and should be designed to capture financial information to make good financial decisions. Each account in the Anglo-Saxon chart is classified into one of the five categories: Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income, and Expenses. Assets Assets are economic resources controlled by a company that are expected to benefit future operations.
It is important to understand that in an accounting sense an asset is not the same as ownership. In accounting, ownership is described by the term "equity." Types of Assets
Liabilities Liabilities are the financial obligations that the company must fulfill in the future. They are typically fulfilled by cash payment. They represent the source of financing provided to a company by its creditors. Types of Liabilities
Owners' Equity Equity represents the source of financing provided to the company by the owners.
Owner's equity is the owners' investments and the total earnings retained from the commencement of the company.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Accounting Equations
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics #has-images
Assets reported on the balance sheet are either purchased by the company or generated through operations; they are financed, directly or indirectly, by the creditors and stockholders of the company. This fundamental accounting relationship provides the basis for recording all transactions in financial reporting and is expressed as the balance sheet equation:
This equation is the foundation for the double-entry bookkeeping system because there are two or more accounts affected by every transaction. If the equation is rearranged:
The above equation shows that the owners' equity is the residual claim of the owners. It is the amount left over after liabilities are deducted from assets. Owners' equity at a given date can be further classified by its origin: capital provided by owners, and earnings retained in the business up to that date.
Net income is equal to the income that a company has after subtracting costs and expenses from total revenue.
Net income is informally called the "bottom line" because it is typically found on the last line of a company's income statement. Balance sheets and income statements are interrelated through the retained earnings component of owners' equity.
The following expanded accounting equation, which is derived from the above equations, provides a combined representation of the balance sheet and income statement:
Because dividends and expenses are deductions from owners' equity, move them to the left side of the equation:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Effects of Transactions on the Accounting Equation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics
The following illustrates how the business transactions of ABC Realty are recorded in a simplified accounting system. 1. Owners' Investments - Invested $50,000 in business in exchange for 5,000 shares of $10 par value stock.
2. Purchase of Assets with Cash - Purchased a lot for $10,000 and a small building on a lot for $25,000.
3. Purchase of Assets by Incurring a Liability - Purchased office supplies for $500 on credit.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Accruals and Valuation Adjustments
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics
Under strict cash basis accounting, revenue is recorded only when cash is received and expenses are recorded only when cash is paid. Net income is cash revenue minus cash expenses. The matching principle is ignored here, resulting inconformity with generally accepted accounting principles.
Most companies use accrual basis accounting, recognizing revenue when it is earned (the goods are sold or the services performed) and recognizing expenses in the period incurred without regard to the time of receipt or payment of cash. Net income is revenue earned minus expenses incurred. Although operating a business is a continuous process, there must be a cut-off point for periodic reports. Reports are prepared at the end of an accounting period.
Some transactions span more than one accounting period and they require adjustments. Adjustments are necessary for determining key profitability performance measures because they affect net income, assets, and liabilities. Adjustments, however, never affect the cash account in the current period. They provide information about future cash flow. For example, accounts receivable indicates expected future cash inflows. The four basic types of adjusting entries are:
In some cases valuation adjustments entries are required for assets. For example, trading securities are always recorded at their current market value, which can change from time to time.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Financial Statements
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics #has-images
Here are financial statements based on previous transactions for ABC Realty.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Flow of Information in an Accounting System
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics #has-images
It is important for an analyst to understand the flow of information through a financial reporting system.
1. Journal entries and adjusting entries Journalizing is the process of chronologically recording transactions.
2. General ledger and T-accounts The items entered in a general journal must be transferred to the general ledger. This procedure, posting, is part of the summarizing and classifying process. The general ledger contains all the same entries as those posted to the general journal; the only difference is that the data are sorted by date in the journal and by account in the ledger. There is a separate T-account for each item in the ledger. A T-account appears as follows:
3. Trial balance and adjusted trial balance A trial balance is a list of all open accounts in the general ledger and their balances.
Since certain accounts may not be accurately stated, adjusting entries may be required to prepare an adjusted trial balance. 4. Finance statements The financial statements can be prepared from the adjusted trial balance. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Using Financial Statements in Security Analysis
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-mechanics
Financial statements are the primary information that firms publish about themselves, and investors and creditors are the primary users of financial statements. Analysts, who work for investors and creditors, may need to make adjustments to reflect items not reported in the statements or assess the reasonableness of managements' judgments. For example, an important first step in analyzing financial statements is identifying the types of accruals and valuation entries in a company's financial statements.
Company management can manipulate financial statements, and a perceptive analyst can use his or her understanding of financial statements to detect misrepresentations. For example, companies may improperly record costs as assets rather than as expenses and amortize the assets over future periods. The goal is to impress shareholders and bankers with higher profits. Consider advertising expenses, which should be charged against income immediately. Certain companies, particularly those selling memberships to customers (e.g., health clubs and Internet access providers), aggressively capitalize these costs and spread them over several periods. Companies may amortize long-term assets too slowly. Slow depreciation or amortization keeps assets on the balance sheet longer, resulting in a higher net worth. With slow amortization, expenses are lower and profits are higher. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Objective of Financial Reporting
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-standards
An awareness of the reporting framework underlying financial reports can assist in security valuation and other financial analysis. This framework describes the objectives of financial reporting, desirable characteristics for financial reports, the elements of financial reports, and the underlying assumptions and constraints of financial reporting. An understanding of the framework that is broader than knowledge of a particular set of rules offers an analyst a basis from which to infer the proper financial reporting, and thus security valuation implications, of any financial statement element transaction.
The objective of financial reporting:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Financial Reporting Standard-Setting Bodies and Regulatory Authorities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-standards
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. The International Financial Reporting Standards Framework
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-standards
The IFRS Framework sets forth the concepts that underlie the preparation and presentation of financial statements for external end-users, provides further guidance on the elements from which financial statements are constructed, and discusses the concepts of capital and capital maintenance.
Objectives of Financial Statements The Framework identifies the central objective of financial statements as providing information about a company that is useful in making economic decisions. Financial statements prepared for this purpose will meet the needs of most end-users. Users generally want information about a company's financial performance, financial position, cash flows, and ability to adapt to changes in the economic environment in which it operates. The Framework identifies end-users as investors and potential investors, employees, lenders, suppliers, creditors, customers, governments, and the public at large. Qualitative Characteristics of Financial Statements The Framework prescribes a number of qualitative characteristics of financial statements. The key characteristics are relevance and reliability. Preparers can face a dilemma in satisfying both criteria at once. For example, information about the outcome of a lawsuit may be relevant, but the financial impact cannot be measured reliably. Financial information is relevant if it has the capacity to influence an end-user's economic decisions. Relevant information will help users evaluate the past, present, and most importantly, future events in a company. To be reliable, financial information must represent faithfully the effects of the transactions and events that it reflects. The true impact of transactions and events can be compromised by the difficulty of measuring transactions reliably.
Financial information must be easily understandable in addition to being relevant and reliable. Preparers should assume that end-users have a reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities, and an ability to comprehend complex financial matters. End-users must be able to compare a company's financial statements through time in order to identify trends in financial performance (comparability). Hence, policies on recognition, measurement, and disclosure must be applied consistently over time. Where a company changes its accounting for the recognition or measurement of transactions, it should disclose the change in the Basis of Accounting section of its financial statements and follow the guidance set out in IFRS. The application of qualitative characteristics and accounting standards usually results in financial statements that show a true and fair view, or fairly present a company's financial position and performance. The Elements of Financial Statements The Framework outlines definition and recognition criteria fo... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. General Requirements for Financial Statements
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-standards
The objective of IAS No. 1 is to prescribe the basis for the presentation of general-purpose financial statements, to ensure comparability both with the company's financial statements of previous periods and with the financial statements of other entities. To achieve this objective, this Standard sets out overall requirements for the presentation of financial statements, guidelines for their structure, and minimum requirements for their content.
Components of Financial Statements A complete set of financial statements comprises:
Fundamental Principles Underlying the Preparation of Financial Statements A company whose financial statements comply with IFRS shall make an explicit and unreserved statement of such compliance in the notes. Financial statements shall not be described as complying with IFRS unless they comply with all the requirements of IFRS. Underlying principles:
Presentation requirements:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 5. Comparison of IFRS with Alternative Reporting Systems
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-standards
A significant number of the world's listed companies report under either IFRS or U.S. GAAP. Although these standards are moving toward convergence, there are still significant differences in the framework and individual standards. Frequently, companies provide reconciliations and disclosures regarding the significant differences between reporting bases. These reconciliations can be reviewed to identify significant items that could affect security valuation. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Components and Format of the Income Statement
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
The income statement presents information on the financial results of a company's activities over a period of time. The format of the income statement is not specified by U.S. GAAP and the actual format varies across companies. Here are common components:
The... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Revenue Recognition
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
There are two revenue and expense recognition issues when accrual accounting is used to prepare financial statements:
Revenue is generally recognized when it is (1) realized or realizable, and (2) earned. The general rule for revenue recognition includes the "concept of realization." Two conditions must be met for revenue recognition to take place: 1. Completion of the earnings process The company must have provided all or virtually all the goods or services for which it is to be paid, and it must be possible to measure the total expected cost of providing the goods or services. No remaining significant contingent obligation should exist. This condition is not met if the company has the obligation to provide future services (such as warranty protection) but cannot estimate the associated expenses. 2. Assurance of payment The quantification of cash or assets expected to be received for the goods or services provided must be reliable. These conditions are typically met at the time of sale, but there are many exceptions, which will be discussed next. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Revenue Recognition in Special Cases
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
In limited circumstances, specific revenue recognition methods may be applicable.
Long-term Contracts A long-term contract is one that spans multiple accounting periods. How should a company apportion the revenue earned under a long-term contract to each accounting period?
Percentage-of-completion Revenues and expenses are recognized each period in proportion to the work completed. This is used for a long-term project if all of the following conditions are met:
It recognizes profit corresponding to the percentage of cost incurred to total estimated costs associated with long-term construction contracts. It is the preferred method because it provides a better measure of operating activities and a more informative disclosure of the status of incomplete contracts. It also facilitates the forecast of future performance and cash flows. This method highlights the relationship among the income statement (revenues), the balance sheet (resulting receivables), and the cash flow statement (current collections). The percentage-of-completion is equal to actual cost/estimated total cost, or it can be determined by an engineering estimate. Using the first approach:
To date, the most recent estimate of the total cost is used in computing the progress toward completion. It means that if cost estimates are revised as the project progresses, that effect is recognized in the period in which the change is made. Costs and revenues of prior periods are not restated. Completed Contract This method does not recognize revenue and expense until the contract is completed and the title is transferred. All profits are recognized when the contract is completed. The completed contract method is used when:
This method is more conservative than the percentage-of-completion method. Analysts may need to rely on the statement of cash flows to assess the contribution of long-term contracts to a company's profitability. Installment Sales This method is used if the costs to provide goods or services are known but the collectability of sales proceeds cannot be reasonably determined. It recognizes both revenue and the associated cost of goods sold only when cash is received. Gross profit (sales - costs of goods sold) reflects the proportion of cash received. This method is sometimes used to report income from sales of noncurrent assets and real estate transactions. Cost Recovery This method is similar to the installment sales method but is more conservative. It ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Revenue Recognition Accounting Standards Issued May 2014
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
In May 2014, the IASB and FASB each issued a converged standard for revenue recognition. The standards are effective for reporting periods beginning after 1 January 2017 under IFRS and 15 December 2016 under U.S. GAAP.
Key aspects of the converged accounting standards: The core principle of the new standard is for companies to recognize revenue to depict the transfer of goods or services to customers in amounts that reflect the consideration (that is, payment) to which the company expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. Companies under contract to provide goods or services to a customer will be required to follow a five-step process to recognize revenue:
The standard introduces new, increased requirements for disclosure of revenue in a reporter's financial statements. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
#obgyn
If abnormal FHR strip and resuscitation interventions (change position, IV fluid, O2 (only if need), stop oxy if abn tracing while in labour) not working, move on to c/s if ~3 cm. If ~8cm, fetal scalp sampling can be good to make sure baby okay to have assisted vag delivery (forceps/vacuum).
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Expense Recognition
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
The matching principle states that operating performance can be measured only if related revenues and expenses are accounted for during the same period ("let the expense follow the revenues"). Expenses are recognized not when wages are paid, when the work is performed, or when a product is produced, but when the work (service) or the product actually makes its contribution to revenue. Thus, expense recognition is tied to revenue recognition.
Expenses incurred to generate revenues must be matched against those revenues in the time periods when the revenues are recognized.
The problem of expense recognition is as complex as that of revenue recognition. For costs that are not directly related to revenues, accountants must develop a "rational and systematic" allocation policy that will approximate the matching principle. However, matching permits certain costs to be deferred and treated as assets on the balance sheet when in fact these costs may not have future benefits. If abused, this principle permits the balance sheet to become a "dumping ground" for unmatched costs. The Matching of Inventory Costs with Revenues Please refer to Reading 29 [Inventories] for details. Some issues in expense recognition: Doubtful Accounts Account receivables arise from sales to customers who do not immediately pay cash. There are always some customers who cannot or will not pay their debts. The accounts owed by these customers are called uncollected accounts. Therefore, accounts receivables are valued and reported at net realizable value - the net amount expected to be received in cash, which is not necessarily the amount legally receivable. The chief problem in recording uncollectible accounts receivable is establishing the time at which to record the loss. Under the direct write-off method, uncollectible accounts are charged to expense in the period that they are determined to be worthless. No entry is made until a specific account has definitely been established as uncollectible. This method is easy and convenient to apply. However, it usually does not match costs with revenues of the period, nor does it result in receivables being stated at estimated realizable value on the balance sheet. Advocates of the allowance method believe that bad debt expense should be recorded in the same period as the sale to obtain a proper matching of expenses and revenues and to achieve a proper carrying value for accounts receivable. In practice, the estimate of bad debt is made either on the percentage-of-sales basis (income statement approach) or outstanding-receivables basis (balance sheet approach). Warranties Warranty costs are a classic example of a loss contingency. Although the future cost amount, due date, and customer are not known for certain, a liability is probable and should be recognized if it can be reasonably estimated. Depreciation and Amortization Please refer to Reading 30 [Long-Lived Assets] for details. Financial Analysis Implications In expense recognition, choice of method (i.e., the depreciation method and the inventory method) as well as estimates (i.e., uncollectible accounts, warranty expenses, assets' useful life, and salvage value) affect a company's reported income. An analyst should identify differences in companies' expense-recognition methods and adjust r... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 6. Non-Recurring Items and Non-Operating Items
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-income-statement
The goal of analyzing an income statement is to derive an effective indicator to predict future earnings and cash flows. Net income includes the impact of non-recurring items, which are transitory or random in nature. Therefore, net income is not the best indicator of future income. Recurring pre-tax income from continuing operations represents the company's sustainable income and therefore should be the primary focus of analysis.
Segregating the results of recurring operations from those of non-recurring items facilitates the forecasting of future earnings and cash flows. Generally, analysts should exclude items that are non-recurring in nature when predicting a company's future earnings and cash flows. However, this does not mean that every non-recurring item in the income statement should be ignored. Management tends to label many items in the income statement as "non-recurring," especially those that reduce reported income. For the purpose of analysis, an important issue is to assess whether non-recurring items are really "non-recurring," regardless of their accounting labels. There are four types of non-recurring items in an income statement. 1. Discontinued operations Discontinued operations are not a component of persistent or recurring net income from continuing operations. To qualify, the assets, results of operations, and investing and financing activities of a business segment must be separable from those of the company. The separation must be possible physically and operationally, and for financial reporting purposes. Any gains or disposal will not contribute to future income and cash flows, and therefore can be reported only after disposal, that is - when realized.
2. Extraordinary items Extraordinary items are BOTH unusual in nature AND infrequent in occurrence, and material in amount. They must be reported separately (below the line) net of income tax. Common examples are:
Note that gains and losses from the early retirement of debt used to be treated as extraordinary items; SFAS No. 145 now requires them to be treated as part of continuing operations. 3. Unusual or infrequent items These are either unusual in nature OR infrequent in occurrence but not both. They may be disclosed separately (as a single-line item) as a component of income from continuing operations. They are reported pre-tax in the income statement and appear "above the line," while the other three categories are reported on an after-tax basis and "below the line" and excluded from net income from continuing operations. Common examples are:
4. Changes in accounting principles Changes in accounting principles, such as from LIFO to another inventory method or from the percentage-of-completion method to the completed-contract method, can be either voluntary changes or changes mandated by new accounting standards. They are reported in the same manner as extraordinary items and discontinued operations. The cumulative impact on prior period earnings should be reported as a separate line item on the income statement on... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Earnings per Share
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-income-statement
Earnings per share (EPS) is a measure that is widely used to evaluate the profitability of a company.
A company's capital structure is simple if it consists of only common stock or includes no potential common stock that upon conversion or exercise could dilute earnings per common share. Companies with simple capital structures only need to report basic EPS. A complex capital structure contains securities that could have a dilutive effect on earnings per common share. Dilutive securities are securities that, upon conversion or exercise, could dilute earnings per share. These securities include options, warrants, convertible bonds, and preferred stocks. Companies with complex capital structures must report both basic EPS and diluted EPS. Calculation of diluted EPS under a complex capital structure allows investors to see the adverse impact on EPS if all diluted securities are converted into common stock. Basic EPS To calculate EPS in a simple capital structure:
The current year's preferred dividends are subtracted from net income because EPS refers to earnings available to the common shareholder. Common stock dividends are not subtracted from net income. Since the number of common shares outstanding may change over the year, the weighted average is used to compute EPS. The weighted average number of common shares is the number of shares outstanding during the year weighted by the portion of the year they were outstanding. Analysts need to find the equivalent number of whole shares outstanding for the year. Three steps are used to compute the weighted average number of common shares outstanding:
Stock Dividends and Splits In computing the weighted average number of shares, stock dividends and stock splits are only changes in the units of measurement, not changes in the ownership of earnings. A stock dividend or split does not change the shareholders' total investment (i.e., it means more pieces of paper for shareholders). When a stock dividend or split occurs, computation of the weighted average number of shares requires restatement of the shares outstanding before the stock dividend or split. It is not weighted by the portion of the year after the stock dividend or split occurred. Specifically, before starting the three steps of computing the weighted average, the following numbers should be restated to reflect the effects of the stock dividend/split:
If a stock dividend or split occurs after the end of the year but before the financial statements are issued, the weighted average number of shares outstanding for the year (and any other years presented in comparative form) must be restated. Example 1. 01/01/15 - 100... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Analysis of the Income Statement
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-income-statement
Common-Size Analysis of the Income Statement
This topic will be discussed in detail in Reading 28 [Financial Analysis Techniques]. Income Statement Ratios The following operating profitability ratios measure the rates of profit on sales (profit margins).
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 9. Comprehensive Income
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-income-statement
Comprehensive income includes both net income and other revenue and expense items that are excluded from the net income calculation.
Comprehensive income is the sum of net income and other items that must bypass the income statement because they have not been realized, including items like an unrealized holding gain or loss from available-for-sale securities and foreign currency translation gains or losses. These items are not part of net income, yet are important enough to be included in comprehensive income, giving the user a bigger, more comprehensive picture of the organization as a whole. The following table is from the Statement of Stockholders' Equity section of the 3M's 2001 annual report.
This section describes the composition of comprehensive income. It begins with net income and then includes those items affecting stockholders' equity that do not flow through the income statement. For 3M, these items include:
FASB has taken the position that income for a period should be all-inclusive comprehensive income. Comprehensive income may be reported on an income statement or separate statement, but is usually reported on a statement of stockholders' equity. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Components and Format of the Balance Sheet
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-balance-sheets
The starting place for analyzing a company is typically the balance sheet. Think of the balance sheet as a photo of the business at a specific point in time. It presents the assets, liabilities, and equity ownership of a company as of a specific date.
The balance sheet provides users, such as creditors and investors, with information regarding the sources of finance available for projects and infrastructure. At the same time, it normally provides information about the future earnings capacity of a company's assets as well as an indication of cash flow implicit in the receivables and inventories. The balance sheet has many limitations, especially relating to the measurement of assets and liabilities. The lack of timely recognition of liabilities and, sometimes, assets, coupled with historical costs as opposed to fair value accounting for all items on the balance sheet, implies that the financial analyst must make numerous adjustments to determine the economic net worth of the company. The analyst must understand the components, structure, and format of the balance sheet in order to evaluate the liquidity, solvency, and overall financial position of a company. Balance Sheet Format Balance sheet accounts are classified so that similar items are grouped together to arrive at significant subtotals. Furthermore, the material is arranged so that important relationships are shown. The table below indicates the general format of balance sheet presentation:
This format is referred to as the account format, which follows the pattern of the traditional general ledger accounts, with assets at the left and liabilities and equity at the right of a central dividing line. A report format balance sheet lists assets, liabilities, and equity in a single column. Balance Sheet Components Current Assets These are cash and other assets expected to be converted into cash, sold, or consumed either in one year or in the operating cycle, whichever is longer. The operating cycle is the average time between the acquisition of materials and supplies and the realization of cash through sales of the product for which the materials and supplies were acquired. The cycle operates from cash through inventory, production, and receivables back to cash. Where there are several operating cycles within one year, the one-year period is used. If the operating cycle is more than one year, the longer period is used. Long-Term Investments Often referred to simply as investments, these are to be held for many years and are not acquired with the intention of disposing of them in the near future.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Measurement Bases of Assets and Liabilities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-balance-sheets
Asset and liability values reported on a balance sheet may be measured on the basis of fair value or historical cost. Historical cost values may be quite different from economic values. The balance sheet must be evaluated critically in light of accounting policies applied in order to answer the question of how the values relate to economic reality and to each other.
Current Assets Current assets are presented in the balance sheet in order of liquidity. The five major items found in the current assets section are:
Current Liabilities Current liabilities are typically paid from current assets or by incurring new short-term liabilities. They are not reported in any consistent order. A typical order is: accounts payable, notes payable, accrued items (e.g., accrued warranty costs, compensation and benefits), income taxes payable, current maturities of long-term debt, unearned revenue, etc. Tangible Assets These are carried at their historical cost less any accumulated depreciation or accumulated depletion. See Reading 30 [Long-Lived Assets] for details. Intangible Assets Intangible assets are long-term assets that have no physical substance but have a value based on rights or privileges that belong to their owner. Generally, identifiable intangible assets are recorded only when purchased (at acquisition costs). The cost of internally developed identifiable intangible assets is typically expensed when incurred. For example, R&D costs are not in themselves intangible assets. They should be treated as revenue expenditures and charged to expense in the period in which they are incurred. One exception is that IFRS allows costs in the development stage to be capitalized if certain criteria (including technological feasibility) are met. A company should assess whether the useful life of an intangible asset is finite or infinite and, if finite, the length of its life. The straight-line method is typically used for amortization. Goodwill is an example of an unidentifiable intangible asset which cannot be acquired singly and typically possesses an indefinite benefit period. It stems from such factors as a good reputation, loyal customers, and superior management. Any business that earns significantly more than a normal rate of return actually has goodwill. Goodwill is recorded in the accounts only if it is purchased by acquiring another business at a price higher than the fair market value of its net identifiable assets. It is not valued directly but inferred from the values of the acquired assets compared with the purchase price. It is the premium paid for the target company's reputation, brand names, customers or suppliers, technical knowledge, key personnel, and so forth. Goodwill only has value insofar as it represents a sustainable competitive advantage that will result in abnormally hig... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 3. Financial Instruments: Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-balance-sheets
Financial instruments are contracts that give rise to both a financial asset of one company and a financial liability of another company. Financial instruments come in a variety of forms which include derivatives, hedges, and marketable securities.
Measured at fair market value: Financial assets:
Financial liabilities:
Measured at cost or amortized cost: Financial assets:
Financial liabilities:
Accounting for Gains and Losses on Marketable Securities
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
#obgyn
Meconium aspiration may cause both mechanical obstruction of the airways and chemical pneumonitis, in addition to severe pulmonary hypertension.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
#obgyn
If infant is vigorous and crying immediately after birth, suctioning the mouth and nares is not necessarily recommended in the presence of meconium
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
#obgyn
If infant is depressed at birth, tracheal intubation and suctioning of meconium from the lower airway should be done.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. Equity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-balance-sheets
Equity is a residual value of assets which the owner has claim to after satisfying other claims on the assets (liabilities). There are five potential components that comprise the owner's equity section of the balance sheet:
Statement of Changes in Shareholders' Equity This statement reflects information about increases or decreases to a company's net assets or wealth. It reveals much more about the year's stockholders' equity transactions than the statement of retained earnings.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Uses and Analysis of the Balance Sheet
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-balance-sheets
Common-Size Analysis of Balance Sheets
This topic will be discussed in detail in Reading 28 [Financial Analysis Techniques]. Balance Sheet Ratios Liquidity ratios measure the ability of a company to meet future short-term financial obligations from current assets and, more importantly, cash flows. Each of the following ratios takes a slightly different view of cash or near-cash items.
Solvency ratios measure a company's ability to meet long-term and other obligations.
Financial statement analysis aims to investigate a company's financial condition and operating performance. Using financial ratios helps to examine relationships among individual data items from financial statements. Although ratios by themselves cannot answer questions, they can help analysts ask the right questions in financial statement analysis. As analytical tools, ratios are attractive because they are simple and convenient. However, ratios are only as good as the data upon which they are based and the information with which they are compared. Fr... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Classification of Cash Flows and Non-Cash Activities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-cashflow-statements
The cash flow statement provides important information about a company's cash receipts and cash payments during an accounting period as well as information about a company's operating, investing and financing activities. Although the income statement provides a measure of a company's success, cash and cash flow are also vital to a company's long-term success. Information on the sources and uses of cash helps creditors, investors, and other statement users evaluate the company's liquidity, solvency, and financial flexibility.
Cash receipts and cash payments during a period are classified in the statement of cash flows into three different activities: Operating Activities These involve the cash effects of transactions that enter into the determination of net income and changes in the working capital accounts (accounts receivable, inventory, and accounts payable). Cash flows from operating activities (CFOs) reflect the company's ability to generate sufficient cash from its continuing operations. CFOs are derived by converting the income statement from an accrual basis to a cash basis. For most companies, positive operating cash flows are essential for long-run survival. The major operating cash flows are (1) cash received from customers, (2) cash paid to suppliers and employees, (3) interest and dividends received, (4) interest paid, and (5) income taxes paid. Special items to note:
Investing Activities These include making and collecting loans and acquiring and disposing of investments (both debt and equity) and property, plants, and equipment. In general, these items relate to the long-term asset items on the balance sheet. Investing cash flows reflect how a company plans its expansions. Examples are:
Financing Activities These involve liability and owner's equity items, and include:
In general, the items in this section relate to the debt and the equity items on the balance sheet. Financing cash flows reflect how the company plans to finance its expansion and reward its owners. Examples:
Purchase of debt and equity securities fro... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Preparing the Cash Flow Statement
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #understanding-cashflow-statements
The beginning and ending cash balances on the statement of cash flows tie directly to the Cash and Cash Equivalents accounts listed on the balance sheets at the beginning and end of the accounting period.
Net income differs from net operating cash flows for several reasons.
There are two methods of converting the income statement from an accrual basis to a cash basis. Companies can use either the direct or the indirect method for reporting their operating cash flow.
Direct Method Under the direct method, the statement of cash flows reports net cash flows from operations as major classes of operating cash receipts and cash disbursements. This method converts each item on the income statement to its cash equivalent. The net cash flows from operations are determined by the difference between cash receipts and cash disbursements. Assume that Bismark Company has the following balance sheet and income statement information:
Additional information:
Direct Method:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Cash Flow Statement Analysis
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #understanding-cashflow-statements
Evaluation of the Sources and Uses of Cash
Analysts should assess the sources and uses of cash between the three main categories and investigate what factors drive the change of cash flow within each category. For example, if operating cash flow is growing, does that indicate success as the result of increasing sales or expense reductions? Are working capital investments increasing or decreasing? Is the company dependent on external financing? Answers to questions like these are critical for analysts and can help form a foundation for evaluating the financial health of an industry or company. Please refer to the textbook for specific examples. Common-Size Analysis of the Statement of Cash Flows This topic will be discussed in detail in Reading 28 [Financial Analysis Techniques]. Free Cash Flow to the Firm and Free Cash Flow to Equity From an analyst's point of view, cash flows from operation activities have two major drawbacks:
Free Cash Flow (FCF) is intended to measure the cash available to a company for discretionary uses after making all required cash outlays. It accounts for capital expenditures and dividend payments, which are essential to the ongoing nature of the business. The basic definition is cash from operations less the amount of capital expenditures required to maintain the company's present productive capacity.
Free Cash Flow to the Firm (FCFF): Cash available to shareholders and bondholders after taxes, capital investment, and WC investment.
Example Quinton is evaluating Proust Company for 2014. Quinton has gathered the following information (in millions):
Calculate the FCFF for Proust for the year. Solution NCC = Depreci... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Analysis Tools and Techniques
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-analysis-techniques #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images
Financial analysis techniques are useful in summarizing financial reporting data and evaluating the performance and financial position of companies. The results of financial techniques provide important inputs into security valuation.
Ratios Ratios express one quantity in relation to another. As analytical tools, ratios are attractive because they are simple and convenient. They can provide a profile of a company, its economic characteristics and competitive strategies, and its unique operating, financial, and investment characteristics. Ratio analysis is essential to comprehensive financial analysis. However, analysts should understand the following aspects when dealing with ratios:
Limitations: There are a significant number of estimates and subjective information that go into financial statements and therefore it is imperative that the analyst understands the numbers before calculating and relying on ratio analyses based on these numbers. An analyst needs to ask questions like:
Common-size Analysis Raw numbers hide relevant information that percentages frequently unveil. Common-size statements normalize balance sheet, income statement, and cash flow statement items to allow easier comparison of different-sized companies. They reduce all the dollar am... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Common Ratios
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-analysis-techniques #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images
The ratios presented in the textbook are neither exclusive nor uniquely "correct." The definition of many ratios is not standardized and may vary from analyst to analyst, textbook to textbook, and annual report to annual report. The analyst's primary focus should be the relationships indicated by the ratios, not the details of their calculations.
Activity Ratios A company's operating activities require investments in both short-term (inventory and accounts receivable) and long-term (property, plant, and equipment) assets. Activity ratios describe the relationship between the company's level of operations (usually defined as sales) and the assets needed to sustain operating activities. They measure how well a company manages its various assets.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. The DuPont System
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-analysis-techniques #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images
The breakdown of ROE into component ratios to assess the impact of those ratios is generally referred to as the DuPont Model.
Traditional DuPont equation:
Each of these components impacts the overall return to shareholders. An increase in profit margin, asset turnover, or leverage can all increase the return. There is a downside as well. If a company loses money in any year, the asset turnover or financial leverage multiplies this loss effect.
This implies that to improve its return on equity, a company should become more:
A company's over- or underperformance on ROA is due to one or both of these causes, or "drivers." The extended DuPont model takes the above three factors and incorporates the effect of taxes and interest based on the level of financial leverage. It takes the profit margin and backs up to see the effect of interest and taxes on the overall return to shareholders. Therefore the extended model starts with EBIT (Earnings Before Interest and Taxes) rather than net income.
High financial leverage does not always increase ROE; higher financial leverage will lead to a higher interest expense rate, which may offset the benefits of higher leverage. This breakdown will help an analyst understand what happened to a company's ROE and why it happened. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Ratios Used in Equity Analysis, Credit Analysis, and Segment Analysis
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-analysis-techniques #financial-reporting-and-analysis
Equity Analysis
Analysts need to evaluate a company's performance in order to value a security. One of their valuation methods is the use of valuation ratios. Some common valuations ratios are:
These price multiples and dividend-related quantities are discussed in more detail in Study Session 14 (Equity Analysis and Valuation). Credit Analysis Credit analysis is the evaluation of credit risk. How does an analyst who has calculated a ratio know whether it represents good, bad, or indifferent credit quality? Somehow, the analyst must relate the ratio to the likelihood that a borrower will satisfy all scheduled interest and principal payments in full and on time. In practice, this is accomplished by testing financial ratios as predictors of the borrower's propensity not to pay (to default). For example, a company with high financial leverage is statistically more likely to default than one with low leverage, all other factors being equal. Similarly, high fixed-charge coverage implies less default risk than low coverage. After identifying the factors that create high default risk, the analyst can use ratios to rank all borrowers on a relative scale of propensity to default. Many credit analysts conduct their ratio analyses within ranking frameworks established by their employers. In the securities field, bond ratings provide a structure for analysis. Credit rating agencies such as Moody's and Standard & Poor's use financial ratios when assigning a credit rating to a company's debt issues. For example, credit ratios used by Standard & Poor's include EBIT interest coverage, funds from operations to total debt, total debt to EBITDA, and total debt to total debt plus equity. Much research has been performed on the ability of ratios to assess the credit risk of a company (including the risk of bankruptcy) and predict bond ratings and bond yields. Segment Analysis A company may be involved in many different businesses, may do business in many different geographic areas, or may have significant number of customers. It is difficult to analyze a company with multiple business lines because of the inherent differences in financial structures, risk characteristics, etc,. amount the different lines. Aggregation of financial results for all the lines tends to obscure the true picture. A company must disclose information related to various subdivisions of its business.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Model Building and Forecasting
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-analysis-techniques #financial-reporting-and-analysis
The results of financial analysis provide valuable inputs into forecasts of future earnings and cash flow. An analyst can build a model to forecast future performance of a company. Techniques that can be used include:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Cost of Inventories
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
There are two basic issues involved in inventory accounting:
1. Determine the cost of goods available for sale: Beginning Inventory + Purchases. 2. Allocate the cost of total inventory costs (cost of goods available for sale) between two components: COGS on the income statement and the ending inventory on the balance sheet. Note that COGS = (Beginning Inventory + Purchases) - Ending Inventory. The cost flow assumption to be adopted includes specific identification, average cost, FIFO, LIFO, etc. This issue will be discussed in subsequent subjects. Determination of Inventory Cost IFRS and SFAS No. 151 provide similar treatment of the determination of inventory costs. The cost of inventories, capitalized inventory costs, includes all costs incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Inventory Valuation Methods
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
In some cases, it's possible to specifically identify which inventory items have been sold and which remain. Using the specific identification method, the actual costs of the specific units sold are transferred from inventory to the cost of goods sold. (Debit Cost of Goods Sold; Credit Inventory.) This method achieves the proper matching of sales revenue and cost of goods sold when the individual units in the inventory are unique. However, the method becomes cumbersome and may produce misleading results if the inventory consists of homogeneous items. In most cases, companies may be unable to determine exactly which items are sold and which items remain in ending inventory.
The remaining three methods are referred to as cost flow assumptions under GAAP and cost formulas under IFRS. They should be applied only to an inventory of homogeneous items. The cost flow assumption may or may not reflect the physical flow of inventory. Weighted Average Cost Using the weighted average cost method, the average cost of all units in the inventory is computed and used in recording the cost of goods sold. This is the only method in which all units are assigned the same (average) per-unit cost.
FIFO FIFO is the assumption that the first units purchased are the first units sold. Thus inventory is assumed to consist of the most recently purchased units. FIFO assigns current costs to inventory but older (and often lower) costs to the cost of goods sold. LIFO LIFO is the assumption that the most recently acquired goods are sold first. This method matches sales revenue with relatively current costs. In a period of inflation, LIFO usually results in lower reported profits and lower income taxes than the other methods. However, the oldest purchase costs are assigned to inventory, which may result in inventory becoming grossly understated in terms of current replacement costs. LIFO is not allowed under IFRS. In the U.S., however, LIFO is used by approximately 36 percent of U.S. companies because of potential income tax savings. Comparison of Inventory Accounting Methods Inventory data is useful if it reflects the current cost of replacing the inventory. COGS data is useful if it reflects the current cost of replacing the inventory items to continue operations. During periods of stable prices, all three methods will generate the same results for inventory, COGS, and earnings. During periods of rising prices and stable or growing inventories, FIFO measures assets better (the most useful inventory data) but LIFO measures income better.
In an environment of declining inventory unit costs and constant or increasing inventory quantitie... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Periodic versus Perpetual Inventory System
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
The perpetual inventory system updates inventory accounts after each purchase or sale. Inventory quantities are updated continuously. When there is a sale, inventory is reduced and COGS is calculated.
The periodic inventory system records inventory purchase or sale in the "Purchases" account. The "Inventory" account is updated on a periodic basis, at the end of each accounting period (e.g., monthly, quarterly). Cost of goods sold or cost of sale is computed from the ending inventory figure. With perpetual FIFO, the first (or oldest) costs are the first moved from the Inventory account and debited to the Cost of Goods Sold account. The end result under perpetual FIFO is the same as under periodic FIFO. In other words, the first costs are the same whether you move the cost out of inventory with each sale (perpetual) or whether you wait until the year is over (periodic). With perpetual LIFO, the last costs available at the time of the sale are the first to be removed from the Inventory account and debited to the Cost of Goods Sold account. Since this is the perpetual system, we cannot wait until the end of the year to determine the last cost. An entry must be recorded at the time of the sale in order to reduce the Inventory account and increase the Cost of Goods Sold account. If costs continue to rise throughout the entire year, perpetual LIFO will yield a lower cost of goods sold and a higher net income than periodic LIFO. Generally this means that periodic LIFO will result in lower income taxes than perpetual LIFO. Example Date....................................Units....Price 12.31.2008........Beginning Inventory....1.......85 1.1.2009..........Purchase...............1.......87 2.1.2009..........Purchase...............2.......89 6.1.2009..........Sales..................1.......89 12.1.2009.........Purchase...............1.......90 Under perpetual LIFO the following entry must be made at the time of the sale: $89 will be credited to Inventory and $89 will be debited from Cost of Goods Sold. If that was the only item sold during the year, at the end of the year the Cost of Goods Sold account will have a balance of $89 and the cost in the Inventory account will be $351 ($85 + $87 + $89 + $90). Under periodic LIFO we assign the last cost of $90 to the one item that was sold. (If two items were sold, $90 would be assigned to the first item and $89 to the second item.) The remaining $350 is assigned to inventory. The $350 of inventory cost consists of $85 + $87 + $89 + $89. The $90 assigned to the item that was sold is permanently gone from inventory. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. The LIFO Method
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
In the U.S., firms that use LIFO must report a LIFO reserve. The LIFO reserve is the difference between the inventory balance shown on the balance sheet and the amount that would have been reported had the firm used FIFO. That is:
It represents the cumulative effect over time of ending inventory under LIFO vs. FIFO. When adjusting COGS from LIFO to FIFO: COGSFIFO = COGSLIFO - Change in LIFO Reserve. LIFO Liquidations So far, discussions have been based on the assumptions of rising prices and stable or growing inventory quantity. As a result, the LIFO reserve increases over time. However, LIFO reserves can decline for either of the two reasons listed below. In either case, the COGS will be smaller and the reported income will be higher relative to what they would have been if the LIFO reserve had not declined. However, the implications of a decline in the LIFO reserve on financial analysis vary, depending on the reason for the decline.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Measurement of Inventory Value
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Under IFRS, inventories are reported at the lower of cost or net realizable value (NRV).
IFRS does not apply to the measurement of inventories held by producers of agricultural and forest products, mineral products, or commodity brokers and dealers. Their inventories are measured at net realizable value (above or below cost) in accordance with well-established practices in those industries. Similarly, GAAP requires the use of the lower-of-cost-or-market valuation basis (LCM) for inventories, with market value defined as replacement cost. Reversal is prohibited, however. The LCM valuation basis follows the principle of conservatism (on both the balance sheet and income statement) since it recognizes losses or declines in market value as they occur, whereas increases are reported only when inventory is sold. Here are some relevant terms:
Example Historical cost: $5,000 Market cost: $2,000 Estimated selling price: $4,000 Estimated costs to complete sale: $1,000 Net realizable value: $4,000 - $1,000 = $3,000
Now assume NRV increases from $3,000 to $4,000 and the market cost increases from $2,000 to $3,000.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Financial Analysis of Inventories
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #inventories #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Financial statement disclosures provide information regarding the accounting policies adopted in measuring inventories, the principal uncertainties regarding the use of estimates related to inventories, and details of the inventory carrying amounts and costs. This information can greatly assist analysts in their evaluation of a company's inventory management.
Presentation and Disclosure Consistency of inventory accounting policy is required under both U.S. GAAP and IFRS. If a company changes an inventory accounting policy, the change must be justifiable and all financial statements accounted for retrospectively. The one exception is for a change to the LIFO method under U.S. GAAP; the change is accounted for prospectively and there is no retrospective adjustment to the financial statements. Inventory Ratios Inventory turnover measures how fast a company moves its inventory through the system.
This ratio can be used to measure how well a firm manages its inventories. The lower the ratio, the longer the time between when the good is produced or purchased and when it is sold.
Financial Analysis: FIFO versus LIFO The advantages of LIFO are:
The disadvantages of LIFO:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Capitalizing versus Expensing
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
The costs of acquiring resources that provide services over more than one operating cycle should be capitalized and carried as assets on the balance sheet. All costs incurred until an asset is ready for use must be capitalized, including the invoice price, applicable sales tax, freight and insurance costs incurred delivering equipment, and any installation costs. Costs of the long-lived asset should be allocated over current and future periods. In contrast, if these assets are expensed, their entire costs are written off as expense on the income statement in the current period. Accounting rules on capitalization are not straightforward. As a result, management has considerable discretion in making decisions such as whether to capitalize or expense the cost of an asset, whether to include interest costs incurred during construction in the capitalized cost, and what types of costs to capitalize for intangible assets. The choice of capitalization or expensing affects the balance sheet, income and cash flow statements, and ratios both in the year the choice is made and over the life of the asset. Here is a summary of the different effects of capitalization versus expensing:
Under SFAS 34, interest is capitalized for certain assets and only if the firm is leveraged. Therefore, the carrying amount of a self-constructed asset depends on the firm's financial decisions. The capitalized interest cost is added to the value of the asset being constructed. The amount of interest cost to be capitalized has two components:
Therefore, the total interest cost incurred during the accounting period has two parts:
The total interest cost, along with the amount capitalized, must be disclosed as part of the notes to the financial statements. Once the construction is complete, capitalized interest costs will be written off as part of depreciation over the useful life of the asset. From ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Intangible Assets
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
Intangible assets are identifiable nonmonetary resources controlled by firms. Examples include patents, copyrights, franchises, goodwill, trademarks, trade names, secret processes, property rights, and organization costs.
Accounting for the Acquisition of Long-Lived Intangible Assets Accounting for an intangible asset depends on how it is acquired. 1. Intangible Assets Purchased in Situations Other than Business Combinations These are accounted for at acquisition costs. "Cost" includes purchase price, legal fees, and other expenses that make the intangibles ready for use. For example, fees paid to obtain a license or franchise are capitalized. Another example: expenditures on patents and copyrights purchased from another party are capitalized. They are amortized over their remaining legal lives or 40 years, whichever is less. The straight-line method is typically used for amortization. 2. Intangible Assets Developed Internally For internally generated intangible assets, it is difficult to measure costs, benefits, and economic lives. Generally, internally generated assets (such as costs of R&D, patents and copyrights, brands and trademarks, and advertising and secret processes) must be expensed in the period incurred. One exception is research and development (R&D) expenditures which add risk to investment with uncertain future economic benefits. As a result, they must be expensed as incurred in most countries (including the U.S.). SFAS 86 requires that all R&D costs to establish the technological and/or economic feasibility of software must be expensed. Subsequent costs that are beyond the point of technological feasibility can - but don't have to - be capitalized as part of product inventory and amortized based on revenues or on a straight-line basis. The point of technological feasibility is the point when a software prototype has been proven to be technologically feasible, as evidenced by the existence of a working model of the software. IFRS also requires research costs be expensed but allows development costs to be capitalized under certain conditions. As you can see, managers have considerable discretion in making decisions, such as whether or when to capitalize these costs and by how much. For software development costs, one particular risk is that capitalized costs will not be realized and a future write-down may be needed. If companies apply different approaches to capitalizing software development costs, adjustments can be made to make the two comparable. 3. Intangible Assets Acquired in a Business Combination Business combinations are accomplished when one entity (investor) acquires "control" over the net assets of another entity. The transaction is accounted for using the purchase method of accounting, in which the company identified as the acquirer allocates the purchase price to each asset acquired (and each liability assumed) on the basis of its fair value. Any excess of cost over fair value of net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. U.S. GAAP requires that in-process R&D (IPRD) of the target company should be expensed at the date of acquisition, which results in a large one-time charge. IFRS requires identifying IFRD as a separate asset with a finite life or including it as part of goodwill. Amortizing Intangible Assets with Finite Useful Lives An intangible asset with a finite useful life is amortized over its useful life. The estimates required for amortization calculations are: original valuation amount, residual value at the end of useful life, and the length of useful life. Example Torch, Inc. has developed a new device. Patent registration costs consisted of $2,000 in attorney fees and $1,000 in federal registration fees. The device has a useful life of 5 years. The legal life is 17 y... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Depreciation Methods
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
For accountants, depreciation is an allocation process, not a valuation process. It is important for analysts to differentiate between accounting depreciation and economic depreciation. Two factors affect the computation of depreciation: depreciable cost (acquisition cost - salvage or residual value) and estimated useful life (depreciable life). Note that it is depreciable cost, not acquisition cost, that is allocated over the useful life of an asset.
The different depreciation methods are:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. The Revaluation Model
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
Under U.S. accounting standards, it is compulsory to account for impairment in long-lived assets (downward revaluation). However, upward revaluation of long-lived assets to reflect fair market values is not allowed.
The balance sheet is more informative when assets and liabilities are stated at market value rather than historical cost. IASB and some other non-U.S. GAAP do permit upward revaluations. The purpose of a revaluation is to bring into the books the fair market value of long-lived assets.
Financial Statement Analysis Considerations
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Impairment of Assets
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
Sometimes a long-term asset may lose some of its revenue-generating ability prior to the end of its useful life. (e.g., a significant decrease in the market value, physical change, or use of the assets). If the carrying amount of the asset is determined not to be recoverable, an asset impairment occurs and the carrying value should be written down. The amount of the write-down is recorded as a loss.
GAAP and IFRS differ as to the methodology used to determine impairment. The GAAP methodology of determining impairment uses a two-step recoverability test. Occurrence of an impairment differs from recognition of an impairment. An impairment, whether recognized in financial reports or not, occurs as long as an asset's carrying value cannot be fully recovered in the future. However, only impairments that meet certain conditions are recognized in financial reports. SFAS 121 provides a two-step process:
Conversely, IFRS methodology uses a one-step approach. This approach requires that impairment loss be calculated if "impairment indicators" exist. This approach does not rely on net undiscounted future cash flows and subsequent comparison to asset carrying value as required in GAAP methodology. In addition, the impairment loss is calculated as the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds it recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the following: 1) fair value less cost to sell, or 2) value in use (i.e., the present value of future cash flows including disposal value). Impairment of Intangible Assets
Among the most interesting intangible assets is goodwill. Goodwill is the present value of future earnings in excess of a normal return on net identifiable assets. It stems from such factors as a good reputation, loyal customers, and superior management. Any business that earns significantly more than a normal rate of return actually has goodwill. Goodwill is recorded in the accounts only if it is purchased by acquiring another business at a price higher than the fair market value of its net identifiable assets. It is not valued directly but inferred from the values of the acquired assets compared with the purchase price. It is the premium paid for the target company's reputation, brand names, customers or suppliers, technical knowledge, key personnel, and so forth. Goodwill only has value insofar as it represents a sustainable competitive advantage that will result in abnormally high earnings. Analysts need to be aware of the possibility that the goodwill recognized by accountants may, in fact, represent overpayment for the acquired company. Since goodwill is inferred rather than computed directly, it will increase as the payment price increases. It is only after the passage of time that analysts will be able to evaluate the extent to which the purchase price was justified. Under U.S. GAAP SFAS 142, goodwill is not amortized, but is tested annually for impairment. Goodwill impairment for each reporting unit should be tested in a two-step process at least once a year. 1. The fair value of a reporting unit is compared to its ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Derecognition
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
For accounting purposes, an asset may be disposed of in three different ways. It may be:
When plant assets are disposed of, depreciation should be recorded on the date of disposal. The cost is then removed from the asset account and the total recorded depreciation is removed from the accumulated depreciation account. Normally an asset's market value at the time of sale or disposal will most likely be different than the asset's book value (its original historical cost minus all accumulated depreciation on that asset). The sale of a plant asset at a price above or below book value results in a gain or loss to be reported in the income statement. Because different depreciation methods are used for income tax purposes, the gain or loss reported on income tax returns may differ from that shown in the income statement. It is the gain or loss shown in the financial statement that is recorded in the company's general ledger accounts. To illustrate each of these methods consider this. A machine was purchased on 1 January Year 1 for $1,000. The depreciation method was straight-line with a useful-life of 5 years and an estimated residual value of $200. On 31 July Year 3 the firm decides to dispose of the asset. The firm has a December year-end. The first step irrespective of the method of disposal is to calculate the depreciation up to the date of sale: Depreciation per year = (Cost - residual value) / Useful life = (1,000 - 200) / 5 = $160 Depreciation for year 1 = $160 Depreciation for year 2 = $160 Depreciation for year 3 = $93 (160 x 7/12) Total: $413 Remember that the depreciation for year 3 is only for 7 months, as the asset is disposed of on 31 July Year 3. Sale of Long-Lived Assets The gain or loss on the sale of long-lived assets is computed as the sales proceeds minus the carrying value of the asset at the time of sale. Assume that the machinery is sold for cash in three scenarios: a. Sold for $587 cash (Sale of machinery for carrying value) Debit: Cash (B/S) $587 Debit: Accumulated depreciation (B/S) $413 Credit: Machinery (B/S) $1000 b. Sold for $600 cash (Sale of machinery for above carrying value) Debit: Cash (B/S) $600 Debit: Accumulated depreciation (B/S) $413 Credit: Machinery (B/S) $1000 Credit: Profit on sale of machinery (I/S) $13 c. Sold for $500 cash (Sale of machinery for below carrying value) Debit: Cash (B/S) $500 Debit: Accumulated depreciation (B/S) $413 Debit: Loss on sale of machinery (I/S) $87 Credit: Machinery (B/S) $1000 In summary, when disposing of an asset, entries are prepared to:
Exchange of Long-Lived Assets If an asset is exchanged for another asset, the basic accounting is similar to the accounting for sales of plant assets for cash. If the trade-in allowance received is greater than the carrying value of the asset surrendered, there has been a gain. If the allowance is less, there has been a loss. Level II will cover some special rules for recognizing these gains and losses, depending on the nature of the assets exchanged:
Abandoned If an a... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Presentation and Disclosures
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
Property, Plant, and Equipment (PP&E)
IAS 16 provides a long list of disclosure requirements for PP&E. For each class of PP&E, the financial statements must disclose the following:
U.S. GAAP require a company to disclose the depreciation expense for the period, the balances of assets, accumulated depreciation and a general description of the depreciation method(s) used. Intangible Assets IAS 38 provides a considerable set of disclosure requirements for intangible assets. For each class of intangibles, and distinguishing between internally generated and other assets, the financial statements must disclose:
Under U.S. GAAP, a company is required to disclose the gross carrying amounts and accumulated amortization, the aggregated amortization expense for the period, and the estimated amortization expense for the next 5 years. Impairment of Assets As with most other standards, IAS 36 provides a long list of disclosure requirements. To begin with, for each class of assets, the financial statements must disclose:
U.S. GAAP require a company to disclose a description of the impaired asset, what caused impairment, the method of determining fair value, the amount of impairment loss, and where the loss is recognized on the financial statements. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Investment Property
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities #long-lived-assets
Investment property is defined as property that is owned (or, in some cases, leased under a finance lease) for the purpose of earning rental income, capital appreciation, or both.
Under IFRS, companies are allowed to value investment properties using either a cost model or a fair value model.
Under U.S. GAAP, there is no specific definition of investment property. Investment properties are generally measured using the cost model. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Key Terms
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
The computation of income taxes poses problems in financial reporting. The major problems arise because current period taxable income is measured using different rules than those used in accounting for pretax income.
Taxes are paid based on tax reporting, but from a financial reporting standpoint, the tax expense in the income statement (IS) is based on the matching principle and is computed on pretax accounting income. In order to achieve matching between taxes based on taxable income and taxes based on pretax income for accounting purposes, deferred tax entries are put through the accounting books. The differences between the tax expense for tax and the accounting tax expense create deferred tax liabilities (credits) and deferred tax assets (debits or prepaid taxes). Here are key terms based on tax return:
Here are key terms based on financial reporting:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Tax reporting and financial reporting are based on two different sets of assumptions. This is particularly true in the U.S. because financial reporting does not have to conform to tax reporting, as it does in Japan, Germany, and Switzerland. Numerous items create differences between accounting profit and taxable income. As a result, the taxes payable for the period are often different from the tax expenses recognized in the financial statements.
In the U.S.:
Because of the differences between tax accounting and financial accounting, the financial statements may include tax liabilities or assets - allowances that have been made in the financial statements for taxes that have not yet been or have already been paid. Deferred tax liabilities generally arise when tax relief is provided in advance of an accounting expense, or when income is accrued but not taxed until received. Deferred tax liabilities on an individual transaction are expected to be reversed when these liabilities are settled, causing future cash outflows. A typical example is depreciation: a company uses the Accelerated Cost Recovery System for tax reporting but uses straight-line depreciation for financial reporting.
Deferred tax assets generally arise when tax relief is provided after an expense is deducted for accounting purposes. Deferred tax assets on an individual transaction are expected to be reversed when these assets are recovered, causing future cash inflows. Different treatments of warranty expenses in tax reporting and financial reporting are a common cause of deferred tax assets:
In the U.S., deferred tax assets/liabilities are classified on the balance sheet as current or non-current based on the classification of the underlying asset or liability. However, deferred tax assets/liabilities are always classified as non-current under IFRS. A deferred tax item cannot be created if it is doubtful that the company will realize economic benefits in the future. Example A company purchases an asset for $1,000 at the beginning of Year 1. It depreciates the asset at 33% per annum (straight-line) for financial reporting. The tax depreciation is 50% per annum (straight-line). The pretax income and taxable income are $2,0... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Determining the Tax Base of Assets and Liabilities
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
The tax base of an asset or liability is the amount attributed to that asset or liability for tax purposes.
The Tax Base of an Asset An asset's tax base is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against any taxable economic benefits that will flow to an entity when it recovers the asset's carrying amount. It is the amount that would be tax deductible if the asset was sold on the balance sheet date. For example, a firm has total accounts receivable of $100,000. At the end of the year, management recognized a specific doubtful debt division of $3,000 for financial reporting. However, provisions for doubtful debts are not allowed for tax purposes in the firm's tax jurisdiction. A tax deduction is received when the receivable is written off as bad debt. The carrying amount of the accounts receivable becomes $97,000. The tax base of the asset still remains $100,000. The firm has a deductible temporary difference of $3,000. Management should recognize a deferred tax asset in respect to the deductible temporary difference. If the economic benefit will not be taxable, the tax base of the asset will be equal to the carrying amount of the asset. An example is dividends receivable from a subsidiary. If it is not taxable, the tax base and the carrying amount of the dividends receivable are equal. The Tax Base of a Liability The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount, less any amount that will be deductible for tax purposes with respect to that liability in future periods.
Example At the beginning of the year a firm received a lump sum of $5 million for rent from a lessee. The rent was for the use of an office building for the next 5 years. Local tax authorities require 70% of rent received in advance to be taxable income. At the end of the year, $4 million should be treated as a liability for financial reporting purposes. That's the carrying amount. The tax base of the liability is $1.2 million (30% of $4 million) and $2.8 million should be treated as taxable income. Changes in Income Tax Rates When tax rates change, the deferred tax liability or asset has to be adjusted immediately to the new amount that is now expected, based upon the new expected tax consequences. The effect of this change in estimate will be included in the income from continuing operations. The effect of an income tax rate increase:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Temporary versus Permanent Differences
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #has-images #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Numerous items create differences between accounting profit and taxable income. These differences can be divided into two types.
Permanent differences do not cause deferred tax liabilities or assets. These occur if a revenue or expense item:
Therefore, permanent differences result from revenues and expenses that are reportable on either tax returns or in financial statements but not both. Permanent differences arise because the tax code excludes certain revenues from taxation and limits the deductibility of certain expenses.
These differences are permanent because they will not reverse in future periods. No deferred tax consequences are recognized for permanent differences; however, they result in a difference between the effective tax rate and the statutory tax rate that should be considered in the analysis of effective tax rates. Example A company owns a $50,000 municipal bond with a 4% coupon and has an effective tax rate of 50% and a statutory tax rate of 40%. Calculate the deferred tax created by this bond. Solution The bond does not result in deferred tax, as the difference it causes is a permanent difference that will not reverse. As a result, no deferred tax is recognized. Temporary differences result in deferred tax liabilities or assets. Different depreciation methods or estimates used in tax reporting and financial reporting are a common cause of temporary differences. There are two categories of temporary differences. Taxable Temporary Differences (TTD)
Items that give rise to taxable temporary differences are:
Deductible Temporary Differences (DTD)
Items that give rise to deductible temporary differences are:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 5. Recognition and Measurement of Current and Deferred Tax
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are re-assessed on each balance sheet date.
Valuation Allowance Deferred tax assets are reduced by a valuation allowance to amounts that are "more likely than not" to be realized, taking into account all available positive and negative evidence about the future. For determining whether deferred tax assets must be reduced by a valuation allowance, all available positive and negative evidence must be considered. Information concerning recent pretax accounting earnings generally is critical. For example, if a firm has been recording material cumulative losses recently, it will be hard to justify a conclusion that tax credits can be realized in the near future. This will be evidence supporting the use of a valuation allowance ("negative evidence"). It is not necessary to quantify positive evidence for the conclusion that a valuation allowance is not required unless significant negative evidence exists. Where both positive and negative evidence exist, judgment must be used in evaluating what evidence is more persuasive. More weight should be given to objectively verifiable evidence. Recognition of Current and Deferred Tax Charged Directly to Equity A firm's deferred tax liability during an accounting period represents the portion of income tax expense that has not been paid. Therefore, from a pure accounting perspective, deferred tax liabilities are an accounting liability. However, from a financial analyst's perspective, whether deferred tax liabilities should be considered liabilities or not depends on whether they will reverse in the future. If they will, resulting in a cash outflow, then they should be treated as liabilities. If not, then they should be treated as equity! As deferred tax liabilities are created by temporary differences, reversal of a deferred tax liability depends on the reversal of the temporary difference that created it. Changes in a firm's operations or tax law may result in deferred taxes that are never paid or recovered. For example, the use of accelerated depreciation methods for tax reporting creates a temporary difference. Normally, when there is less depreciation in later years, the deferred tax liability created by more depreciation in earlier years will be reversed. However, for firms with high growth rates, increased investments in fixed assets result in ever-increasing new deferred tax liabilities, which replace the reversing one. That is, a firm's growth may continually generate deferred tax liabilities. In this case, the deferred taxes are unlikely to be paid. Therefore, for such high-growth firms, deferred tax liabilities will not reverse and should be treated as equity. Deferred tax liabilities are recorded at their stated value. Even if deferred taxes are eventually paid, payments typically occur far in the future. The present value of those payments is considerably lower than the stated amounts. Thus, the deferred tax liability should be discounted at an appropriate interest rate and the difference should be treated as equity. In some cases, financial statement depreciation understates the value of economic depreciation. Instead, the accelerated depreciation in tax reporting is a better measure. Examples of such cases include equipment obsolescence due to technology innovation and rising price levels. Deferred tax liabilities are neither liabilities nor equity if they are not expected to reverse, and should be ignored by financial analysts.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 7. Comparison of IFRS and U.S. GAAP
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #income-taxes #inventories-long-lived-assets-income-taxes-and-non-current-liabilities
Similarities
FAS 109 Accounting for Income Taxes and IAS 12 Income Taxes provide the guidance for income tax accounting under U.S. GAAP and IFRS, respectively. Both pronouncements require entities to account for both current tax effects and expected future tax consequences of events that have been recognized (that is, deferred taxes) using an asset and liability approach. Further, deferred taxes for temporary differences arising from non-deductible goodwill are not recorded under either approach and the tax effects of items directly accounted for as equity during the current year are also allocated directly to equity. Finally, neither principle permits the discounting of deferred taxes. Significant Differences and Convergence Below we discuss the significant differences in the current literature. Tax basis:
Uncertain tax positions:
Initial recognition exemption:
Recognition of deferred tax assets:
Calculation of deferred asset or liability:
Classification of deferred tax assets and liabilities in balance sheet:
Recognition of deferred tax liabilities from investments in subsidiaries or joint ventures (JVs) (often referred to as outside basis differences):
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Reporting Quality and Results Quality
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-quality
Financial reporting quality: a subjective evaluation of the extent to which financial reporting is free of manipulation and accurately reflects the financial condition and operating success of a company. It pertains to the information disclosed. Earnings are considered to be high quality if they exhibit persistence and are unbiased. Sustainable earnings enable better forecasts of future cash flows or earnings. This is referred to as results quality or earnings quality. Financial reporting quality is different from earnings quality. The two concepts are, however, interrelated because a correct assessment of earnings quality is possible only if we have some basic level of financial reporting quality. Low financial reporting quality makes it hard to assess earnings quality. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Quality Spectrum of Financial Reports
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-quality
Financial reporting quality varies across companies.
GAAP, Decision-Useful, Sustainable, and Adequate Returns
GAAP, Decision-Useful, but Sustainable?
Biased Accounting Choices
Departures from GAAP It is difficult or impossible to assess earnings quality. Engaging in fraudulent financial reporting provides no quality of earnings. Conservative and Aggressive Accounting An aspect of financial reporting quality is the degree to which accounting choices are conservative or aggressive. "Aggressive" typically refers to choices that aim to enhance a company's reported performance and financial position by inflating the amount of revenues, earnings, and/or operating cash flow reported in the period or by decreasing the amount of expenses reported in the period and/or the amount of debt reported on the balance sheet. Conservatism in financial reports can result from either (1) accounting standards that specifically require a conservative treatment of a transaction or an event or (2) judgments necessarily made by managers when applying accounting standards that result in more or less conservative results. An example of conservatism in the oil and gas industry is the revenue recognition accounting standard. This standard permits recognition of revenue only at the time of shipment rather than closer to the time of actual value creation (which is the time of discovery). Big Bath Accounting The strategy of manipulating a company's income statement to make poor results look even worse. The big bath is often implemented in a bad year to artificially enhance next year's earnings. The big rise in earnings might result in a larger bonus for executives. Cookie Jar Reserve Accounting Companies shift earnings around by creating overly large reserve accounts in good years then drawing them down in bad years. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Context for Assessing Financial Reporting Quality
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-quality
Motivations for managers to issue less than high quality financial reports:
Management might have an incentive to manipulate earnings lower as well, possibly to smooth higher earnings in the current quarter into weaker quarters. Conditions conductive to issuing low-quality financial reports:
Mechanisms that discipline financial reporting quality:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. Detection of Financial Reporting Quality Issues
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-reporting-quality
There is really nothing new in this reading, just a review of the previous material. A lot of the accounting practices are highlighted elsewhere in the curriculum but are reiterated here.
Presentation Choice If a company uses a non-GAAP financial measure in an SEC filing, it is required to provide the most directly comparable GAAP measure with equivalent prominence in the filing. In addition, the company is required to provide a reconciliation between the non-GAAP measure and the equivalent GAAP measure. Similarly, IFRS require that any non-IFRS measures included in financial reports must be defined and their potential relevance explained. The non-IFRS measures must be reconciled with IFRS measures. Accounting Choices and Estimates Managers' considerable flexibility in choosing their companies' accounting policies and formulating estimates provides opportunities for aggressive accounting. Examples include:
Cash flow, especially operating cash flow and free cash flow, are always at the heart of any discussion of financial performance and valuation. Investors, creditors, and analysts are all interested in whether a firm is generating cash flow and where that cash flow can be expected to recur. Operating cash flow is usually unaffected by estimates and judgments. However, firms can still create the perception that sustainable operating cash flow is greater than it actually is. One technique is to misrepresent a firm's cash-generating ability by classifying financing activities as operating activities and vice versa. Additionally, management has discretion over the timing of cash flows and where to report cash flows. Warning Signs Analysts should pay attention to:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
#obgyn
evasion of host immune system + integration of HPV DNA into susceptible epithelial cells in transformation zone → cervical cancer
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Evaluating Past Financial Performance
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-statement-analysis-applications
This reading describes selected applications of financial statement analysis. In all cases, the analyst needs to have a good understanding of the financial reporting standards under which financial statements are prepared. Because standards evolve over time, analysts must make sure their knowledge is current in order to make good investment decisions.
Evaluating a company's historical performance addresses not only what happened but also the causes behind the company's performance and how the performance reflects the company's strategy. The analyst needs to create common-size financial statements, calculate the financial ratios of the company, its competitors, and the industry, and make necessary adjustments. After processing the data, the analyst should perform:
When examining the data, the analyst should try to find answers to critical questions, including:
Two examples are presented in the textbook to illustrate the application. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Projecting Future Financial Performance
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-statement-analysis-applications
The projection of a company's future net income and cash flow often begins with a top-down sales forecast in which the analyst forecasts industry sales and the company's market share. The company's sales are then estimated as its projected market share multiplied by projected total industry sales. Note that the key financial driver for most companies is the estimate of future sales from their products and services. By projecting profit margins and expenses, and the level of investment in working capital and fixed capital needed to support projected sales, the analyst can forecast net income and cash flow. When projecting profit margins:
Sensitivity analysis is often used to assess the impact of different assumptions on income and cash flow. These assumptions include sales forecasts, working capital requirements, profit margins, etc. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Assessing Credit Risk
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-statement-analysis-applications
Credit risk is risk due to uncertainty about a counterparty's ability to meet its obligation. Credit analysis is the evaluation of credit risk. It focuses on debt-paying ability and cash flow rather than accrual-income returns.
Moody's ratings focus primarily on four factors: 1. Company profile - Scale and diversification. These elements are indicative of other characteristics that mitigate risk and are a good indicator of market leadership, purchasing power, operational flexibility, the potential for enhanced access to financing and the capital markets, etc. 2. Financial policies - Tolerance for leverage. Cash flow available to service indebtedness is considered the most fundamental measure of credit stature. Various solvency ratios are used for that purpose:
3. Operational efficiency. This factor is analogous to operating leverage. Since they can generate larger levels of cash flow, companies with low operating leverage (i.e., superior profit margins) can afford to have larger debt loads. Owing to the fact that debt loads can be restructured, low-cost companies have better prospects than high-cost companies when faced with financial stress/distress and forced reorganizations. 4. Margin stability. Lower volatility in margins would imply lower risk relative to economic conditions. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Screening for Potential Equity Investments
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-statement-analysis-applications
A bottom-up manager is one who looks for stocks company by company. These are the classic "stock pickers," who don't care if a stock represents an airline or a drugmaker. If the stock meets their criteria, they go for it. This approach is the opposite of that of a top-down manager. These managers take a bird's-eye view of the economy. They try to select industry groups, and then stocks, that stand to benefit from the large trends they see. Regardless of their philosophy, portfolio managers employ ratios using financial statement data and market data to screen for potential equity investments. Fundamental decisions include:
Many studies have been done to determine the most effective accounting ratios for screening equity investments. Backtesting is the process of testing a trading strategy on prior time periods. Instead of applying a strategy for the time period forward (which could take years), an analyst can do a simulation of his or her trading strategy on relevant past data in order to gauge its effectiveness. However, as frequently heard, "past performance does not necessarily guarantee future returns"; backtesting may not provide a reliable indication of future performance because of survivorship bias, look-ahead bias, or data-snooping. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Analyst Adjustments to Reported Financials
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #financial-reporting-and-analysis #financial-statement-analysis-applications
Analysts' adjustments to a company's reported financial statements are sometimes necessary (e.g., when comparing companies that use different accounting methods or assumptions). A balance-focused framework for analyst adjustments is presented in the textbook.
Investments Adjustments Different categories of investment securities have different treatments regarding unrealized holding gains and losses. Depending on management's intention, investment securities can be classified as:
Adjustments may be needed to facilitate the comparison of two otherwise comparable companies that have significant differences in the classification of investments. Inventory Adjustments IAS No.2 does not permit the use of LIFO. If a company not reporting under IFRS uses LIFO but another company uses FIFO, comparison of the two companies may be difficult. Reading 29 [Inventories] illustrates how to make an inventory adjustment and its impact. Property, Plant and Equipment Companies may choose different depreciation methods (e.g., a straight-line method or an accelerated method) and accounting estimates (e.g., salvage value or useful life) related to depreciation. Disclosures required for depreciation often do not facilitate specific adjustments. Analysts may evaluate the relationships between various depreciation-related items (e.g., gross PPE, accumulated depreciation, depreciation expense, cash flows for capital expenditure, and asset disposals).
The above three indicators are discussed in Reading 30 [Long-Lived Assets].
Goodwill Goodwill is recorded as an asset if one company purchases another for a price that is more than the fair value of the assets acquired. Internally generated goodwill is not recorded on the balance sheet. Adjustments are needed to compare two otherwise comparable companies when one has a recorded goodwill asset. The textbook provides an excellent example of the ratio comparisons for goodwill. Off-Balance-Sheet Financing This topic is covered in Reading 32 [Non-current (Long-term) Liabilities]. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Capital Budgeting: Introduction
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance
Capital budgeting is the process of planning expenditures on assets (fixed assets) whose cash flows are expected to extend beyond one year. Managers analyze projects and decide which ones to include in the capital budget.
The typical steps in the capital budgeting process:
Project classifications:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Basic Principles of Capital Budgeting
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images
Capital budgeting decisions are based on incremental after-tax cash flows discounted at the opportunity cost of capital. Assumptions of capital budgeting are:
Important capital budgeting concepts:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Investment Decision Criteria
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images
When a firm is embarking upon a project, it needs tools to assist in making the decision of whether to invest in the project or not. In order to demonstrate the use of these four methods, the cash flows presented below will be used.
Net Present Value (NPV) This method discounts all cash flows (including both inflows and outflows) at the project's cost of capital and then sums those cash flows. The project is accepted if the NPV is positive.
where CFt is the expected cash flow at period t, k is the project's cost of capital, and n is its life.
The NPV represents the amount of present-value cash flows that a project can generate after repaying the invested capital (project cost) and the required rate of return on that capital. An NPV of zero signifies that the project's cash flows are just sufficient to repay the invested capital and to provide the required rate of return on that capital. If a firm takes on a project with a positive NPV, the position of the stockholders is improved. Decision rules:
NPV measures the dollar benefit of the project to shareholders. However, it does not measure the rate of return of the project, and thus cannot provide "safety margin" information. Safety margin refers to how much the project return could fall in percentage terms before the invested capital is at risk. Assuming the cost of capital for the firm is 10%, calculate each cash flow by dividing the cash flow by (1 + k)t where k is the cost of capital and t is the year number. Calculate the NPV for Project A and B above. NPV = CF0 + CF1 + CF2 + CF3 + CF4 Project A's NPV = -1,000 + 750/1.101 + 350/1.102 + 150/1.103 + 50/1.104 = -1,000 + 682 + 289 + 113 + 34 = $118 (rounded) Project B's NPV = -1,000 + 100/1.101 + 250/1.102 + 450/1.103 + 750/1.104 = -1,000 + 91 + 207 + 338 + 512 = $148 (rounded) Internal Rate of Return (IRR) This is the discount rate that forces a project's NPV to equal zero.
Note that this formula is simply the NPV formula solved for the particular discount rate that forces the NPV to equal zero. The IRR on a project is its expected rate of return. The NPV and IRR methods will usually lead to the same accept or reject decisions. Decision rules:
IRR does provide "safety margin" information. Calculate Project A's and B's IRR. Project A: -1000 + 750/(1 + IRR)1 + 350/(1+IRR)2 + 150/(1+IRR)3 + 50/(1+IRR)4 = 0 Since it is difficult to determine by hand, the use of a financial calculator i... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. NPV Profiles
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images
A NPV profile is a graph showing the relationship between a project's NPV and the firm's cost of capital. The point where a project's net present value profile crosses the horizontal axis indicates a project's internal rate of return.
Some observations:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 5. Comparison of the NPV and IRR Methods
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images
The IRR formula is simply the NPV formula solved for the particular rate that sets the NPV to 0. The same equation is used for both methods.
The NPV method assumes that cash flows will be reinvested at the firm's cost of capital, while the IRR method assumes reinvestment at the project's IRR. Reinvestment at the cost of capital is a better assumption in that it is closer to reality.
For independent projects, the NPV and IRR methods indicate the same accept or reject decisions. Assuming that Project A and B are independent, consider their NPV profiles.
However, for mutually exclusive projects, ranking conflicts can arise. Assuming that Project A and B are mutually exclusive, consider their NPV profiles.
For mutually exclusive projects, the NPV and MIRR methods will lead to the same accept or reject decision when:
However, the projects can generate conflicting results if the NPV profiles of two projects cross (and there is a crossover rate):
Two conditions cause the NPV profiles to cross:
The root cause of the conflict between NPV and IRR is the rate of return at which differential cash flows can be reinvested. Both the NPV and IRR methods assume that the firm will reinvest all early cash flows. The NPV method implicitly assumes that early cash flows can be reinvested at the cost of capital. The IRR method assumes that the firm can reinvest at the IRR. Whenever a conflict exists, the NPV method should be used. It can be demonstrated that the better assumption is the cost of capital for the reinvestment rate (Hint: don't focus too much on this topic, as it is beyond the scope of the CFA exam). Multiple IRRs is a situation where a project has two or more IRRs. This problem is caused by the non-conventional cash flows of a project.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 6. Popularity and Usage of the Capital Budgeting Method
#capital-budgeting #cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance
The usefulness of various capital budgeting methods depends on their specific applications. Although financial textbooks often recommend the use of NPV and IRR methods, other methods are also heavily used by corporations.
Capital budgeting is also relevant to external analysts in estimating the value of stock prices. Theoretically, if a company invests in positive NPV projects, the wealth of its shareholders should increase. The integrity of a firm's capital budgeting processes can also be used to show how the management pursues its goal of shareholder wealth maximization. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Cost of Capital
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
Capital is a necessary factor of production, and has a cost. The providers of capital require a return on their money. A firm must ensure that stockholders or those that have lent the firm money (such as banks) receive the return that they require. This return is the cost that the firm will incur to maintain those sources of capital. Therefore, the return that the providers of funds require is equal to the cost to the firm of maintaining those funds.
Calculating the cost of capital is important for a firm, as this is the rate of return that must be used when evaluating capital projects. The return from the project must be greater than the cost of the project in order for it to be acceptable. In general, a firm can finance its operations from three main sources of capital:
Each of these sources of capital has a cost. The cost of capital used in capital budgeting should be calculated as a weighted average, or composite, of the various types of funds a firm generally uses.
Taxes and the Cost of Capital Interest on debt is tax deductible; therefore, to calculate the cost of debt, the tax benefit is deducted. This means that after-tax cost of debt = interest rate - tax savings (the government pays part of the cost of debt as interest is tax deductible). There is no tax savings associated with the use of preferred stock or common stock. Weights of the Weighted Average The target capital structure is the percentage of debt, preferred stock, and common equity that a firm is striving to maintain and that will maximize the firm's stock price. Each firm has a target capital structure, and it should raise new capital in a manner that will keep the actual capital structure on target over time.
Example Firm A has a capital structure consisting of 40% debt, 5% preferred stock, and 55% common equity (made up of retained earnings and common stock). Firm A pays 10% interest on its debt and has a marginal tax rate of 35%. If Firm A's component cost of preferred stock is 12.5% and the component cost of common stock equity from retained earnings is 13.5%, calculate Firm A's WACC. WACC = 0.4 x 10% (1 - 0.35) + 0.05 x 12.5% + 0.55 x 13.5% = 0.026 + 0.00625 + 0.07425 = 10.65% Investment Opportunity Schedule In any one year, a firm may consider a number of capital projects. The greater the number of projects undertaken, the more money the firm will have to raise in order to finance them. There is a limit to the amount of money that can be raised in any one year ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Cost of Debt and Preferred Stock
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
Capital components are the types of capital used by firms to raise fund. They include the items on the right side of a firm's balance sheet (debt, preferred stock, and common equity). Any increase in the firm's total assets must be financed by one or more of these capital components.
The cost of debt is defined as the cost to the firm in terms of the interest rate that it pays for ordinary debt (rd) less the tax savings that are achieved. Interest on debt is tax-deductible and therefore to calculate the cost of debt the tax benefit is deducted. Two methods to estimate the before-tax cost of debt (rd) are discussed. Yield-to-Maturity Approach This approach uses the familiar bond valuation equation. Assuming semi-annual coupon payments, the equation is:
The six-month yield (rd/2) is derived and then annualized to arrive at the before-tax cost of debt, rd. See Reading 54 for details of the yield-to-maturity approach. Debt-Rating Approach This approach can be used if there isn't a reliable market price for a firm's debt. Based on the company's debt rating, the before-tax cost of debt is estimated by using the yield on comparably rated bonds for maturities that are a close match to those of the firm's existing debt. For example, assume that:
Then the company's after-tax cost of debt is 6% x (1 - 30%) = 4.2%. Other factors, such as debt seniority and security, may complicate the calculation, so analysts must take care when determining the comparable debt rating and yield. Issues in Estimating the Cost of Debt
Cost of Preferred Stock The cost of preferred stock is calculated by dividing the dollar amount of the dividend (which is normally paid on an annual basis) by the preferred stock current price.
It is important to note that tax does not affect the calculation of the cost of preferred stock, since preferred dividends are not tax deductible. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 3. Cost of Common Equity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
The cost of common equity (re) is the rate of return stockholders require on common equity capital the firm obtains. It has no direct costs but is related to the opportunity cost of capital: if the firm cannot invest newly obtained equity or retained earnings and earn at least re, it should pay these funds to its stockholders and let them invest directly in other assets that do provide this return. Firms should earn on retained earnings at least the rate of return shareholders expect to earn on alternative investments with equivalent risk.
Estimating the cost of common equity is challenging due to the uncertain nature of the amount and timing of future cash flows. The CAPM Approach
where RF is the risk-free rate, E(RM) is the expected rate of return on the market, and βi is the stock's beta coefficient. [E(RM) - RF] is called the equity risk premium (ERP). Both E(RM) and βineed to be estimated. For example, firm A has a βi of 0.6 for its stock. The risk-free rate, RF, is 5%. The expected rate of return on the market, E(RM), is 10%. The firm's cost of common equity is therefore calculated as 5% + (10% - 5%) x 0.6 = 8%. There are several ways to estimate the equity risk premium.
Dividend Discount Model Approach
where D1 is the dividend expected to be paid at the end of year 1, P0 is the current price of the stock, and g is the constant growth rate of dividends. P0 is directly known, and D1 can be predicted if the company has a stable dividend policy. However, it is difficult to establish the proper growth rate (g). One method is to forecast the firm's average future dividend payout ratio and its complement, the retention rate: g = (1.0 - Payout rate) (ROE), where ROE is the expected future rate of return on equity. Another method is to use the firm's historical growth rate, if the past growth rates are stable. Bond Yield Plus Risk Premium Approach Because the cost of capital of riskier cash flows is higher than that of less risky cash flows:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. Estimating Beta and Determining a Project Beta
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
The determination of cost of capital under the CAPM approach involves the estimation of β, risk-free rate, and market return. β is generally determined by comparing the return of the firm or the project (as the case may be) with the market return and ascertaining the relationship. The historical β is the first step in the determination of the ex-ante β. Either the historical β can be accepted as the proxy for the future β or modifications can be made to make it conform to the future.
If we are thinking of a new company for a single project, we will have no historical records to go by. We would then compute the β of companies of the same size and about the same lines of business and after making necessary adjustments, take this as the β for the firm. The pure-play method can be used to take a comparable publicly traded company's beta and adjust it for financial leverage differences. The β that we impute to a project is likely to undergo changes with changes in the capital structure of the company. If the company is entirely equity-based, its β is likely to be lower than it would be if it undertakes borrowing. Let us call the β of a firm that is levered "levered β" and that of a firm on an all-equity structure "unlevered β." β of a levered firm:
where: βL = β of a levered firm βU = β of an unlevered firm T = tax rate D = component of debt in capital structure E = component of equity in capital structure If the β of a firm is available and that β has been estimated on the premise that the firm is unlevered, we can now ascertain the β of the firm should it undertake some borrowing by using the following formula: β of an unlevered firm:
In the same way, given the β of a firm which is already levered, we can ascertain what its β would be if it chooses an all-equity structure. This also means that if the target firm has leverage different from the structure assumed in estimating the levered β, this can first be converted into an unlevered β and then re-converted into a levered β using the leverage parameters relevant to the firm. As a first step, we have to identify firms that reasonably resemble the project for which the beta is to be estimated. The stock β of these firms is then taken. Their respective leverage position (ratio of debt to equity) is also considered. After duly adjusting the tax factor and applying the above formula, we can determine the proxy β of the project assuming that it is unlevered. The procedure is illustrated below: Suppose there are three firms, P, Q, and R, which closely resemble project X (that is to be embarked upon). The stock betas of the three firms are taken and found to be 2.73, 2.23, and 1.73 respectively. The ratio of debt to equity for the three firms averages to 0.67. The marginal tax rate is 36%. The average stock β works out to 2.23. Translating these numbers into the formula for unlevered firms, we get: βU = βL / (1 + (1 - T)(D/E)) = 2.23/(1+0.64 x 0.67) = 1.56. This suggests that on an all-equity basis the β of the project would be 1.56. Now, if the project is proposed to be financed by 50% equity and 50% debt, we can modify the above β by applying the formula for levered firms: βL = βU (1 + (1 - T) D/E) = 1.56 (1 + 0.64 x 0.5/0.5) = 2.56 So, on a 1:1 debt equity ratio, the β will be 2.56. This β can be used now for determining the cost of equity for the project and... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Country Risk
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital
β seems not be able to capture country risk for companies in developing countries. Analysts often need to add a country spread (country equity premium) to the market risk premium when using CAPM to estimate the cost of equity.
One simple approach is to use the sovereign yield spread, which represents the yield on a developing country's US$-denominated bond vs. a U.S. Treasury-bond of the same maturity, as a proxy for the country spread. The sovereign yield spread primarily reflects default risk. This approach may be too coarse to estimate equity risk premium. Another approach is to adjust the sovereign yield spread by using the following formula:
The country equity premium is then added to the equity premium estimated for a similar project in a developed country. Example
Estimate the equity risk premium for a similar project in China. Sovereign yield spread: 8.5% - 6.5% = 2% Country risk premium: 2% x (50%/20%) = 5% Equity risk premium: 5% + 10% = 15% |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 6. Marginal Cost of Capital Structure
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
The marginal cost of capital (MCC) is the cost of obtaining another dollar of new capital. The marginal cost rises as more and more capital is raised during a given period.
The marginal cost of capital schedule is a graph that relates the firm's weighted average cost of each dollar of capital to the total amount of new capital raised. The cost of capital is level to the point at which one of the costs of capital changes, such as when the company bumps up against a debt covenant, requiring it to use another form of capital. The break point (BP) is the dollar value of new capital that can be raised before an increase in the firm's weighted average cost of capital occurs.
Example Consider the following schedule of the costs of debt and equity for a company.
Assuming the company's target capital structure is 50% debt and 50% equity, the corresponding marginal cost of capital schedule looks like this: The break points are at $10 million and $20 million. The company can invest up to $10 million with the WACC = 9%. After $10 million, the company will have to raise new equity and new debt at higher costs, and the WACC will rise to 12% if the company wants to raise an additional $10 million. The MCC is the cost of the last dollar raised by the company, while the WACC is the weighted average cost of all capital components used by the company. The MCC will increase as a firm raises more and more capital.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Flotation Costs
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #cost-of-capital #has-images
Flotation costs are the costs of issuing a new security, including the money investment bankers earn from the spread between their cost and the price offered to the public, and the accounting, legal, printing and other costs associated with the issue.
The amount of flotation costs is generally quite low for debt and preferred stock (often 1% or less of the face value), so we ignore them here. However, the flotation costs of issuing common stocks may be substantial, so they must be accounted for in the WACC. Generally, we calculate this by reducing the proceeds from the issue by the amount of the flotation costs and recalculating the cost of equity.
Example 1 XYZ is contemplating issuing new equity. The current price of their stock is $30 and the company expects to raise its current dividend of $1.25 by 7% indefinitely. If the flotation cost is expected to be 9%, what would be the cost of this new source of capital? Cost of external equity = (1.25 x 1.07) / (30 x (1 - 0.09)) + 0.07 = 11.9% Without the flotation cost, the cost of new equity would be (1.25 x 1.07) / 30 + 0.07 = 11.46%. Note that flotation costs will always be given, but they may be given as a dollar amount or as a percentage of the selling price. This is a typical example found in most textbooks. One problem with this approach is that the flotation costs are a cash flow at the initiation of the project and affect the value of any project by reducing the initial cash flow. It is not appropriate to adjust the present value of the future cash flows by a fixed percentage. An alternative approach is to make the adjustment to the cash flows in the valuation computation. Example 2 Continue with the above example. Assume that XYZ is going to raise $10 million in new equity for a project. The initial investment is $10 million and the project is expected to produce cash flows of $4.5 million each year for 3 years. Ignoring the flotation cost of issuing new equity, the NPV of the project will be -10 + 4.5/1.11461 + 4.5/1.11462 + 4.5/1.11463 = $0.9093 million. Now consider the flotation cost of 9%. The NPV, considering the flotation costs, is 0.9093 - 0.9 = $0.0093 million. However, if we use the "typical" approach, the NPV. considering the flotation costs, will be -10 + 4.5/1.1191 + 4.5/1.1192 + 4.5/1.1193 = $0.8268 million. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Business Risk and Operating Leverage
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images #measures-of-leverage
Leverage
Leverage is the extent to which fixed costs are used in a company's cost structure.
Leverage affects a firm's risk, as it can magnify earnings both up and down. The bigger the leverage, the more volatile the firm's future earnings and cash flows, and the greater the discount rate applied in the firm's valuation (by bondholders and stockholders). Business Risk and its Components Business risk is the uncertainty (variability) about projections of future operating earnings. It is the single most important determinant of capital structure. If other elements are the same, the lower a firm's business risk, the higher its optimal debt ratio. Business risk is the combined risk of sales and operations risks.
In general, management has more opportunity to manage and control operating risk than sales risk. Operating Risk A company that has high operating leverage is a company with a large proportion of fixed input costs, whereas a company with largely variable input costs is said to have low operating leverage (due to its small amount of fixed costs). A company with a high degree of operating leverage that has a small change in sales will experience a large change in profits and rate of return. This is due to the fact that because the company has a large fixed cost component, any increase in sales will cause an even greater increase in net income, since the fixed costs have already been incurred. In many respects operating leverage is determined by technology. High (low) operating leverage is usually associated with capital (labor) intensive industries. The degree of operating leverage (DOL) is defined as the percentage change in EBIT (operating income) that results from a given percentage change in sales. It measures the impact of a change in sales on EBIT.
Here Q is the number of units, P is the average sales price per unit of output, V is the variable cost per unit, F is fixed operating cost, S is sales in dollars, and VC is total variable costs. P - V is referred to as the per unit contribution margin, which is the amount that each unit contributes to covering fixed costs. S - VC is called the contribution margin. For example, assume that a firm has sales of $100,000, variable costs of $50,000, and fixed costs of $20,000. Its DOL is (100,000 - 50,000) / (100,000 - 50,000 - 20,000) = 1.67. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Financial Risk and Financial Leverage
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images #measures-of-leverage
Financial risk is the additional risk placed on the common stockholders as a result of the decision to use fixed-income securities (debt and preferred stock). Increases in financial leverage (the use of fixed-income securities) increases financial risk and the expected return of stockholders, due to the obligation of servicing the fixed interest payments.
The questions are: Is the increased rate of return sufficient to compensate shareholders for the increased risk? What is the optimal financial structure to maximize stock price and the firm's value? Financial risk depends on two factors:
As a general proposition, financial leverage raises the expected rate of return, but at the cost of increased financial risk (and thus total risk). So, you are faced with a trade-off: if you use more financial leverage, you increase the expected rate of return, which is good, but you also increase risk, which is bad. The degree of financial leverage (DFL) measures the financial risk.
It shows how a given percentage change in EBIT per share will affect EPS. The equation above is developed as follows:
where: I = interest paid T = marginal tax rate N = number of shares outstanding I is a constant so ΔI = 0, therefore:
Now the percentage change in EPS is the change in EPS divided by the original EPS, which is:
DFL is defined as the percentage change in earnings per share (EPS) divided by the percentage change in EBIT.
Consider a company with EBIT = $100,000 and interest = $20,000. Its DFL = 100,000 / (100,000 - 20,000) = 1.25. Therefore, a 100% increase in EBIT would result in a 125% increase in EPS. Unlike operating leverage, the degree of financial leverage is most often a choice by the company's management. Companies with a higher ratio of tangible assets to total assets may have higher degrees of financial leverage because lenders may feel more secure that their claims would be satisfied in the event of a downturn. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
#obgyn
Acetic acid is used during colpo to highlight dysplastic cells which turn acetowhite in response to its application
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Total Leverage and Breakeven Points
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images #measures-of-leverage
Operating leverage (first-stage leverage) affects EBIT, while financial leverage (second-stage leverage) affects earnings after interests and taxes (net income), which are the earnings available to shareholders. Financial leverage further magnifies the impact of operating leverage on earnings per share (EPS) due to changes in sales.
Both operating leverage and financial leverage contribute to the risk associated with a firm's future cash flows. The degree of total leverage (DTL) combines DOL and DFL, and measures the impact of a given percentage change in sales on EPS.
If both DOL and DFL are high, a small change in sales leads to wide fluctuations in EPS. The breakeven point is the volume of sales at which total costs equal total revenues, causing net income to equal zero: PQ - VQ - F - I = 0. The breakeven number of units, QBE, is:
The operating breakeven point is the number of outputs at which revenues = operating costs: PQOBE = VQOBE + F. QOBE is:
Consider a project where the fixed costs are $10,000, the variable costs are $2 per unit, the selling price per unit is $4, and the interest expense is $1,000. The breakeven sales quantity is 11,000 / (4 - 2) = 5,500 units and the operating breakeven sales quantity is 10,000 / (4 - 2) = 5,000 units. In general, the farther unit sales are from the breakeven point for high-leverage companies, the greater the magnifying effect of this leverage. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 4. The Risks of Creditors and Owners
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #measures-of-leverage
Creditors and stockholders bear different risks because they have different rights and responsibilities.
The use of greater amounts of debt in the capital structure can raise both the cost of debt and the cost of equity capital.
Creditors have priority over stockholders in a bankruptcy proceeding. When a firm files for bankruptcy, its leverage often determines the final outcome.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
#obgyn
Lugol’s iodine may be used during colpo which stains normal epithelium, but not dysplastic epithelium.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Dividends: Forms
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #dividends-and-shares-repurchase-basics
When firms earn income they have choices about what to do with that income. There are a number of options:
This section deals with the policies that firms employ when distributing the income to shareholders. Dividend policy involves three issues:
Firms can pay dividends in a number of ways. Cash Dividends A cash dividend is the type most people are familiar with. It is a cash amount, usually paid on a per share basis. It is paid out of retained earnings.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 2. Dividends: Payment Chronology
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #dividends-and-shares-repurchase-basics #has-images
The dividend payment procedure is as follows:
Interval between key dates: Except for the time between the ex-date and the record date, the time between the other pertinent dates is determined by each company and can vary substantially. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 3. Share Repurchases
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #dividends-and-shares-repurchase-basics
Under a stock repurchase plan, a firm buys back some of its outstanding stock, thereby decreasing the number of shares, which should increase both EPS and the stock price. Unlike stock dividends and stock splits, share repurchases use corporate cash. This is an alternative way of paying cash dividends.
Shares that have been issued and subsequently repurchased become treasury shares, which are not considered for dividends, voting, or computing earnings per share. Reasons for Share Repurchase There are different reasons for share repurchases:
The disadvantages are:
Repurchase Methods The four most important methods are:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Financial Statement Effects of Repurchases
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #dividends-and-shares-repurchase-basics #has-images
A share repurchase should be equivalent to the payment of cash dividends of equal amounts in their effect on shareholders' wealth, all things being equal. This means the taxation and information content of cash dividends and share repurchases do not differ.
Examples Example 1: Equivalent Share Repurchase and Cash Dividends Company XYZ is expected to have $10 million in earnings. It plans to distribute $6 million to shareholders through cash dividends or stock repurchases. The current stock price is $20. The company has 1 million shares outstanding. The stock repurchase can be completed at $20.
Example 2: A Share Repurchase that Transfers Wealth Continuing with the above example, assume that the company has to pay a premium to repurchase shares from a wealthy investor: the stock repurchase price can be completed at $25 per share.
Example 3: Share Repurchases Using Borrowed Funds: The Effect on EPS When the After-Tax Cost of Borrowing Equals E/P ABC Company wants to borrow $10 million to repurchase shares.
With the after-tax cost of borrowing equal to the earnings yield (E/P) of the shares, the share repurchase has no effect on the company's EPS. However, if the after-tax cost of borrowing is greater (less) than the earnings yield, EPS will be less (more) than its pre-repurchase level. A share repurchase may cause the P/E ratio to change as well. For example, if a share repurchase causes a company's financial leverage to change, the financial risk of the company's earnings stream changes and the P/E ratio post-repurchase may change from its pre-repurchase level to reflect the change in risk. Example 4: The Effect of Share Repurchase on Book Value per Share Company X and Company Y have announced a $5 million buyback.
This example shows that book value per share (BVPS) will either increase or decrease depending on whether share price is higher or lower than BVPS. When share price is greater (less) than BVPS, BVPS will decrease (increase) after a share repurchase. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Managing and Measuring Liquidity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #working-capital-management
Working capital management involves the relationship between a firm's short-term assets and its short-term liabilities. The goal of working capital management is to ensure that a firm is able to continue its operations and has sufficient ability to satisfy both maturing short-term debt and upcoming operational expenses. The management of working capital involves managing inventories, accounts receivable and payable, and cash.
Liquidity management refers to the ability of a company to meet its short-term financial obligations. There are two sources of liquidity. The main difference between the two sources is whether or not the company's normal operations will be affected.
Measuring Liquidity Almost all liquidity measures are covered in Reading 26 [Understanding Balance Sheet] and Reading 28 [Financial Analysis Techniques]. Operating cycle = Number of days in inventory + Number of days of receivables Net operating cycle (cash conversion cycle) = Number of days in inventory + Number of days of receivables - Number of days of payables Example Average accounts receivable: $25,400 Average inventory: $48,290 Average accounts payable: $37,510 Credit sales: $325,700 Cost of goods sold: $180,440. Total purchases: $188,920 How many days are in the operating cycle? How many days are in the cash cycle? 1. The receivable turnover rate tells you the number of times during the year that money is loaned to customers. Credit sales / Average accounts receivable = 325,700 / 25,400 = 12.8228. Receivables period = 365 days / 12.8228 = 28.46 days. This tells you that it takes customers an average of 28.46 days to pay for their purchases. 2. The inventory turnover rate indicates the number of times during the year that a firm replaces its inventory. COGS / Average inventory = 180,440 / 48,290 = 3.7366 Inventory period = 365 days / 3.7366 = 97.68 days. This means inventory sits on the shelf for 97.68 days before it is sold. That's ok for a furniture store but you should be highly alarmed if a fast food restaurant has a 98-day inventory period. 3. The accounts payable is matched with total purchases to compute the turnover rate because these accounts are valued based on the wholesale, or production, cost of each item. Payables turnover = Total purchases / Average accounts payables = 188,920 / 37,510 = 5.0365 Payables period = 365 / 5.0365 = 72.47 days. On average, it takes 72.47 days to pay suppliers. The operating cycle begins on the day inventory is purchased and ends when the money is collected from the sale of that inventory. This cycle consists of both the inventory period and the accounts receivable period. Operating cycle = 97.68 + 28.46 = 126.14 days The cash cycle is equal to the operating cycle minus the payables period. It is the number of days for which the firm must finance its own inventory and receivables. During the cash cycle, the firm must have sufficient cash to carry its inventory and receivables. Cash cycle = 126.14 - 72.47 = 53.67 days In this example, the firm must pay for its inventory 53.67 days before it collects the payment from selling that inventory. Controlling the cash cycle is a high priority for financial managers. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Managing the Cash Position
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #working-capital-management
Managing short-term cash flows involves minimizing costs. The two major costs are carrying costs, the return forgone by keeping too much invested in short-term assets such as cash, and shortage costs, the cost of running out of short-term assets. The objective of managing short-term finances and doing short-term financial planning is to find the optimal trade-off between these two costs.
The starting point for good cash flow management is developing a cash flow projection. To forecast short-term cash flows, a financial manager needs to:
Monitoring cash uses and levels means keeping a running score on daily cash flows.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Investing Short-Term Funds
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #working-capital-management
Cash does not pay interest. Companies should invest funds that are not needed in daily transactions. Short-term investment is discussed in the reading.
Nominal rate: a rate of interest based on a security's face value. For a non-zero-bond, the coupon rate is the nominal rate. A yield is the actual return on the investment if it is held to maturity.
Strategies Short-term investment strategies can be grouped into two types:
A company should have a formal, written investment policy or guideline that protects the company and its investment managers. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Evaluating Accounts Receivable, Inventory and Accounts Payable Management
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #has-images #working-capital-management
Accounts Receivable
The most popular measures to evaluate receivables are receivable turnover and number of days of receivables. Example Build It Right, Inc. sells 5,500 curio cabinets a year at a price of $2,000 each. The credit terms of the sale are 2/10, net 45. Eighty percent of the firm's customers take the discount. What is the amount of the firm's accounts receivable? If 80% of the customers pay in 10 days, then the other 20% must pay in 45 days. How much does the firm sell each year? 5,500 x $2,000 = $11,000,000 The average collection period: [0.80 x 10] + [(1 - 0.80) x 45] = 8 + 9 = 17 days. The accounts receivable turnover: 365 / 17 = 21.470588. The average receivables balance: $11,000,000 / 21.470588 = $512,328.77. Inventory Managing inventory is a juggling act. Excessive stocks can place a heavy burden on the cash resources of a business. Insufficient stocks can result in lost sales, delays for customers, etc. The goal of inventory management is to identify the level of inventory which allows for uninterrupted production but reduces the investment in raw materials - and minimizes reordering costs - and hence increases cash flow. Just-In-Time (JIT) is an inventory strategy implemented to improve a business's return on investment by reducing in-process inventory and its associated costs. Economic order quantity (also known as the EOQ Model) is a model that defines the optimal quantity to order that minimizes total variable costs required to order and hold inventory. To evaluate inventory management analysts compute the inventory turnover ratio and the number of days of inventory. These measures are covered in Study Session 8. Accounts Payable Two countering forces should be considered when managing accounts payable:
Trade discounts should be evaluated by computing the implicit rate of return:
Example Today, June 10, you purchased $5,000 worth of materials from one of your suppliers. The terms of the sale are 3/15, net 45.
Analysts often use the number of days of payables and payables turnover to evaluate accounts payable management.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Managing Short-Term Financing
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #working-capital-management
There are two sources of short-term financing:
Bank Sources Unsecured Loans: A form of debt for money borrowed that is not backed by the pledge of specific assets.
Secured Loans: A form of debt for money borrowed in which specific assets have been pledged to guarantee payment.
Nonbank Sources
The best mix of short-term financing depends on:
Cost of Borrowing The fundamental rule is to compute the total cost of borrowing and divide that by the net proceeds.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Summary of Corporate Governance Considerations
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Research findings state that there is a strong correlation between good corporate governance and better valuation results of listed companies. It is important to alert investors to the importance of corporate governance. The manual considers how investors can evaluate the quality of corporate governance.
The Board The primary responsibility of the Board is to foster the long-term success of the corporation, consistent with its fiduciary responsibility to shareowners. To carry out this responsibility, the Board must ensure that it is independent and accountable to shareowners and must exert authority for the continuity of executive leadership with proper vision and values. The Board is singularly responsible for the selection and evaluation of the corporation's chief executive officer; included in that evaluation is assurance as to the quality of senior management. The Board should also be responsible for the review and approval of the corporation's long-term strategy, the assurance of the corporation's financial integrity, and the development of equity and compensation policies that motivate management to achieve and sustain superior long-term performance. The Board should put in place structures and processes that enable it to carry out these responsibilities effectively. Certain issues may be delegated appropriately to committees (including the audit, compensation and corporate governance/nominating committees) to develop recommendations to bring to the Board. Nevertheless, the Board maintains overall responsibility for the work of the committees and the long-term success of the Company. Investors and shareowners should determine whether:
Management Investors and shareowners should:
Shareowner Rights Investors and shareowners should determine:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. What is Corporate Governance?
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Corporate governance is the system by which business corporations are directed and controlled. The corporate governance structure specifies the distribution of rights and responsibilities among different participants in the corporation, such as the board, managers, shareholders, and other stakeholders, and spells out the rules and procedures for making decisions on corporate affairs. By doing this, it also provides the structure through which company objectives are set and the means of attaining those objectives and monitoring performance. Corporate governance is about promoting corporate fairness, transparency, and accountability. Its purpose is to prevent one group from expropriating the cash flows and assets of one or more other groups. Good corporate governance practices:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Board Independence
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Board Members must make decisions based on what ultimately is best for the long-term interests of Shareowners. The major factors that enable a board to act in the best interests of shareowners can be summarized as:
Independence promotes integrity, accountability and effective oversight. We will address experience and resources in later discussions. The term "Board Member" refers to all individuals who sit on the Board, including:
An Independent Board Member is defined as one who has no direct or indirect material relationship with the Company, its subsidiaries, or any of its members other than as a Board Member or Shareowner of the Company. Stated simply, an Independent Board Member must be free of any relationship with the Company or its senior management that may impair the Board Member's ability to make independent judgments or compromise the Board Member's objectivity and loyalty to shareowners. There are many different types of relationships between Board Members and the Company that may be material and preclude a finding of independence, including employment, advisory, business, financial, charitable, family, and personal relationships. In making determinations regarding Independence, the Board shall consider all relevant facts and circumstances and shall apply the following guidelines:
The Board should be comprised of a substantial majority of Independent Board Members. A Board with this makeup and one which is diverse in its composition is more likely to limit undue influence of management and others over the affairs of the Board. The decisions of such a Board will be more likely to aid the Company's long-term success. Things to consider for investors:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Board Member Qualifications
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Board Members who have appropriate experience and expertise relevant to the Company's business are best able to evaluate what is in the best interest of Shareowners. They must be able to contribute business judgment to board deliberations and decisions, based on their experience in relevant business, management disciplines, or other professional life endeavors. Depending on the nature of the business, this may require specialized expertise by at least some Board Members.
If Board Members lack the skills, knowledge, and expertise to conduct a meaningful review of the Company's activities, and are unable to conduct in-depth evaluations of the issues affecting the Company's business, they are more likely to defer to management when making decisions. The following attributes should be considered desirable for Board Members:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Board Resources
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
There need to be internal mechanisms to support the Independent work of the Board, including the budgetary authority to hire outside consultants without management's intervention or approval. This mechanism alone provides the Board with the ability to obtain expert help in specialized areas, to circumvent potential areas of conflict with management, and to preserve the integrity of the Board's Independent oversight function.
Why does the Board need outside third-party consultants?
The Board should have the authority to decide whether to hire external consultants, whom should be hired, and how they are to be compensated, etc. without having to receive approval from management. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Other Board Issues
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Board Member Terms
Shareowners should determine whether Board Members are elected annually or whether the Company has adopted an election process that staggers the terms of Board Member elections. In annual votes, every Board Member stands for re-election every year. Such an approach ensures that Shareowners are able to express their views on individual members' performance during the year and to exercise their right to control who will represent them in corporate governance and oversight of the Company. Companies that prevent Shareowners from electing Board Members on an annual basis limit Shareowners' ability to change the Board composition when, for example, Board Members fail to act on their behalf, or to elect individuals with needed expertise in response to a change in Company strategy. Staggered Board: A Board of directors only a part of which is elected each year, usually to discourage takeover attempts. In a classified or staggered Board, Board Members are typically elected in two or more classes, serving terms greater than one year. A three-year staggered Board, for example, would have one third of the Board Members or nominees eligible for Shareowner ratification for a three-year period at each annual meeting.
Corporate governance best practice guidelines generally supports the annual election of directors as being in the best interest of investors. Investors should consider whether:
Related-Party Transactions Investors should investigate whether the Company engages in outside business relationships with management or Board Members, or individuals associated with them, for goods and services on behalf of the Company. Related-party transactions involve buying, selling, and other transactions with Board Members, executives, partners, employees, family members, and so on. These are not illegal or necessarily a violation of any kind. Current accounting and auditing standards require the disclosure of these transactions (only if material) but no more. Board Members are supposed to make independent decisions. Receiving personal benefits from the Company can create an inherent conflict of interest. Board Members should be discouraged from engaging in the following practices, among others:
When reviewing an issue, investors should determine whether:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Board Committees
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
The Board should delegate certain functions to committees. Under new U.S. regulations, three key committees must be comprised exclusively of independent directors: the audit committee, the compensation committee, and the corporate governance/nominating committee. The new requirements have also greatly expanded the responsibilities and necessary competencies of audit committee members. The credibility of the corporation will depend in part on the vigorous demonstration of independence by the committees and their chairs. Committees should have the right to retain and evaluate outside consultants and to communicate directly with staff below the senior level.
The committees should report back to the board on important issues they have considered and upon which they have taken action. They should meet in executive session on a regular basis with management personnel, if appropriate (because of issues under discussion), and also without such personnel being present. If the company receives a shareholder proposal, the committee most appropriate to consider the matter should review the proposal and the management's response to it.
Audit Committee
Investors should determine whether the Board has established a committee of Independent Board Members, including those with recent and relevant experience of finance and accounting, to oversee the audit of the Company's financial reports.
The audit committee of the Board is established to provide independent oversight of the Company's financial reporting, non-financial corporate disclosure, and internal control systems. This function is essential for effective corporate governance and for seeing that responsibilities to Shareowners are fulfilled.
The committee represents the intersection of the board, management, independent auditors, and internal auditors, and it has sole authority to hire, supervise, and fire the corporation's independent auditors. When selecting auditors, the committee should:
When evaluating the audit committee, investors should determine whether:
Remuneration / Compensation Committee
Investors should determine whether the Company has a committee of Independent Board Members charged with setting ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Implementation of Code of Ethics
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Investors should determine whether the Company has adopted a code of ethics and whether the Company's actions indicate a commitment to an appropriate ethical framework. A Company's Code of Ethics sets standards for ethical conduct based on basic principles of integrity, trust, and honesty. It provides personnel with a framework for behavior while conducting the Company's business, as well as guidance for addressing conflicts of interest. In effect, it represents a part of the Company's risk management policies, which are intended to prevent Company representatives from engaging in practices that could harm the Company, its products, or Shareowners. Reported breaches of ethics in a Company often result in regulatory sanctions, fines, management turnover, and unwanted negative media coverage, all of which can adversely affect the Company's performance. Investors should determine whether the Company:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 9. Personal Use of Company Assets
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Investors should determine whether the Company permits Board Members, management, and their family members to use Company assets for personal reasons.
Company assets are used to conduct Company business. If they are used by anybody for personal reasons, they are not available for investment in productive and income-generating activities. For Board Members, such use also creates conflicts of interest. When reviewing this issue, investors should determine whether the Company:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 10. Executive Compensation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Investors should analyze both the amounts paid to key executives for managing the Company's affairs and the manner in which compensation is provided to determine whether compensation paid to executives is commensurate with the executives' levels of responsibilities and performance and provides appropriate incentives.
Every year, shareowners learn of new jaw-dropping executive compensation packages that seemingly defy rational explanation. In 2004, the average CEO of a major company received $9.84 million in total compensation, according to The New York Times. As described earlier, the Board is responsible for ensuring that an executive compensation program is in place that will attract, retain, and motivate strong management performance. Compensation plans should encourage executives to achieve performance objectives and, in so doing, create long-term shareowner value. Executive compensation has four basic components: base salary, bonuses, stock options, and various perquisites. The amounts paid and the manner in which executive management is compensated can affect Shareowner value in various ways. Investors should examine the reported:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 11. Shareowner Proxy Voting
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Investors should determine whether the Company permits Shareowners to vote their shares by proxy regardless of whether they are able to attend the meeting in person.
The ability to vote one's shares is a fundamental right of share ownership. A company's rules governing shareowner-sponsored board nominations, resolutions, and proposals are generally supportive of shareowner rights, but the rules and the procedures for exercising such rights should not be prohibitively cumbersome. If this is the case, shareowners cannot readily address their concerns in order to protect the value of their shares. Sometimes a Company makes it difficult for Shareowners to vote their common shares by not allowing them the right to vote by proxy or by accepting only those votes cast at its annual general meeting. In examining whether a Company permits proxy voting, investors may ask questions like:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 12. Shareowner Proposals
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Shareowner-Sponsored Board Nominations
Investors should determine whether and under what circumstances Shareowners can nominate individuals for election to the Board or vote to remove Board Members. By doing so they can force the Board or management to take steps to address Shareowner concerns and improve the Company's financial performance. Investors should determine how the Company handles contested Board elections. Shareowner-Sponsored Resolutions Investors should determine whether and under what circumstances Shareowners can submit resolutions for consideration at the Company's annual general meeting. Shareowners are entitled to bring non-binding resolutions to a vote of the shareholders as part of the company's annual meeting process. They may bring resolutions on a wide variety of topics. U.S. SEC Rule 14a-8 governs Shareowner-sponsored resolutions. It appears to do more to protect corporations from shareowners: the SEC rule allows a corporations thirteen circumstances under which it can ignore a Shareowner's resolution. Investors, however, must understand what they can do if the Board or management fails to act in the best interests of all Shareowners. The ability to propose needed changes can prevent erosion of Shareowner value. This could pressure the Board or management to change the way they do business. Investors need to determine how many votes are needed to pass a resolution, whether Shareowners can request a special meeting to address special concerns, and whether proposals benefit all Shareowners or just those making the proposals. Advisory or Binding Shareowner Proposals Investors should determine whether the Board and management are required to implement proposals that Shareowners approve. The Company may tend to ignore those proposals that have been approved but are not binding. Investors should determine whether the Company has implemented or ignored such approved proposals before and whether there are any regulatory concerns about implementing these proposals. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 13. Ownership Structure
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Investors should examine the Company's ownership structure to determine whether it has different classes of common shares that separate the voting rights of those shares from their economic value. The management team and the Board should act in the best interests of all Shareowners. However, if a Company has two classes of common shares (dual classes of common equity):
then the management team and the Board are more likely to focus on the interests of Class A Shareowners. The rights of Class B Shareowners may suffer as a consequence of the ownership structure. The Company's ability to raise equity capital for future investment may also be impaired, as it's difficult to sell unattractive Class B shares to investors. To finance future growth the Company may need to raise debt capital and increase leverage. If you are reviewing the Company, you should consider:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 14. Takeover Defenses
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #corporate-finance #the-corporate-governance-of-listed-companies-a-manual-for-investors
Shareowners should carefully evaluate the structure of an existing or proposed takeover defense and analyze how it could affect the value of shares in a normal market environment and in the event of a takeover bid.
The consequences of mergers and takeovers may include redistribution of income, closing of some plants and expansion of others, and elimination of specific managerial and other positions and creation of others. Various anti-takeover defenses (e.g., golden parachutes, poison pills, and greenmail) tend to favor the interests of managers over those of Shareowners. They often interfere with the ownership rights of Shareowners and constitute an obstacle to efficient reallocation of resources. The justification for the use of various anti-takeover defenses should rest on the support of the majority of Shareowners and on the demonstration that preservation of the integrity of the company is in the long-term interests of Shareowners. However, it is also hard to establish whether these defensive actions cause financial prejudice to Shareowners. Investors should consider the following factors when reviewing a Company's anti-takeover measures:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. A Portfolio Perspective on Investing
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #overview #portfolio-management
Why should investors take a portfolio approach instead of investing in individual stocks? Why put all your eggs in one basket? Portfolio theory is used to maximize an investment's expected rate of return for a given level of risk or minimize the level of risk for a given expected rate of return. For the purpose of investing, risk is defined as the variation of the return from what was expected (volatility). It is represented by a measure such as standard deviation. Diversification is used to reduce a portfolio's overall volatility. Building a portfolio out of many unrelated (uncorrelated) investments minimizes total volatility (risk). The idea is that most assets will provide a return similar to their expected return and will offset those in the portfolio that perform poorly. The diversification ratio is the ratio of the standard deviation of an equally weighted portfolio to the standard deviation of a randomly selected security.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Investment Clients
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #overview #portfolio-management
There are different types of investment clients.
Different individual investors have different investment goals, levels of risk tolerance, and constraints. Some seek growth while others may invest to get regular income. An institutional investor's role is to act as a highly specialized investor on behalf of others. There are many types of institutional investors. A pension plan is a fund that provides retirement income to employees. It is typically considered a long-term investor with high risk tolerance and low liquidity needs.
An endowment or a foundation is an investment fund set up by an institution in which regular withdrawals from the invested capital are used for ongoing operations. Endowments and foundations are often used by universities, hospitals, and churches. They are funded by donations. A typical investment object is to maintain the real value of the fund while generating income to fund the objectives of the institution.
A bank typically has a very short investment horizon and low risk tolerance. Its investments are usually conservative. The investment objective of a bank's excess reserves is to earn a return that is higher than the interest rate it pays on its deposit. Investments made by insurance companies are relatively conservative. Although the income needs are typically low, the liquidity needs of such investments are usually high (in order for insurance companies to pay claims). Both the risk tolerance and the return requirement of mutual funds are predefined for each fund and can vary sharply between funds. They are more specialized than pension funds or insurance companies. Study Session 18 discusses mutual funds in more detail. A sovereign wealth fund is a state-owned investment fund. There are two types of funds: saving funds and stabilization funds. Stabilization funds are created to reduce the volatility of government revenues, to counter the boom-bust cycles' adverse effect on government spending and the national economy. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Steps in the Portfolio Management Process
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #overview #portfolio-management
Step One: The Planning Step
The first step in the portfolio management process is to understand the client's needs and develop an investment policy statement (IPS). The IPS covers the types of risks the investor is willing to assume along with the investment goals and constraints. It should focus on the investor's short-term and long-term needs, familiarity with capital market history, and investor expectations and constraints. Periodically the investor will need to review, update, and change the policy statement. A policy statement is like a road map: it forces investors to understand their own needs and constraints and to articulate them within the construct of realistic goals. It not only helps investors understand the risks and costs of investing, but also guides the actions of portfolio managers. Step Two: The Execution Step The second step is to construct the portfolio. The portfolio manager and the investor determine how to allocate available funds across different countries, asset classes, and securities. This involves constructing a portfolio that will minimize the investor's risk while meeting the needs specified in the policy statement. Step Three: The Feedback Step The process of managing an investment portfolio never stops. Once the funds are initially invested according to plan, the real work begins: monitoring and updating the status of the portfolio and the investor's needs. The last step is the continual monitoring of the investor's needs, capital market conditions, and, when necessary, updating the policy statement. One component of the monitoring process is evaluating a portfolio's performance and comparing the relative results to the expectations and requirements listed in the policy statement. Some rebalancing may be required. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Pooled Investments
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #overview #portfolio-management
"Pooled investments" is a term given to a wide range of investment types, such as mutual funds, exchange traded funds, and separately managed accounts.
When you invest in a pooled investment, your money goes into an investment fund. You pool your money with others to help spread the risk. Professional fund managers then invest the money on your behalf in a highly competitive environment. Mutual Funds An investment company invests a pool of funds belonging to many individuals in a single portfolio of securities. In exchange for this commitment of capital, the investment company issues to each investor new shares representing his or her proportional ownership of the mutually held securities portfolio (commonly known as a mutual fund). Mutual funds are classified according to whether or not they stand ready to redeem investor shares.
Various fees charged by mutual funds:
There are four types of mutual funds based on portfolio makeup.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The risk management process
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-management-introduction
Risk is exposure to uncertainty. In investment, risk includes the possibility of losses.
Taking risks is an active choice by institutions and individuals. Risks must be carefully understood, chosen, and well-managed. Risk exposure is the extent to which an entity's value may be affected through sensitivity to underlying risks. Risk management is a process that defines risk tolerance and measures, monitors, and modifies risks to put them in line with that tolerance.
A risk management framework is the infrastructure, processes, and analytics needed to support effective risk management. It includes:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Risk governance
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-management-introduction
Governance and the entire risk process should take an enterprise risk management perspective to ensure that the value of the entire enterprise is maximized. For example, a corporate pension fund manager should consider not only the pension assets and liabilities but also the parent corporation's business risk profile. In other words, the focus should be on the organization as a whole.
Useful approaches to ensuring a strong risk governance framework:
Risk Tolerance Risk tolerance, a key element of good risk governance, establishes an organization's risk appetite. Ascertaining risk tolerance starts from an inside view and an outside view. What shortfalls within an organization would cause the organization to fail to achieve some critical goals? What are the organization's risk drivers? Which risks are acceptable and which are unacceptable? How much risk can the overall organization be exposed to? Risk tolerance is then formally chosen using a top-level analysis. The organization's goals, expertise in certain areas, and strategies should be considered when determining its risk tolerance. This process should be completed and communicated before a crisis. Risk Budgeting While risk tolerance determines which risks are acceptable, risk budgeting decides how to take risks. It is a means of implementing risk tolerance at a strategic level. Risk budgeting is any means of allocating investments or assets based on their risk characteristics. Single or multiple dimensions of risk can be used. Common single-dimension risk measures are standard deviation, beta, value at risk, and scenario loss. The risk budgeting process forces the firm to consider risk trade-offs. As a result, the firm should choose to invest where the return per unit of risk is the highest. Some risk budgeting practices:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Identification of risks
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-management-introduction
There are two general categorizations of risks.
Financial Risks Financial risks originate from the financial markets.
Non-Financial Risks Non-financial risks arise from actions within an entity or from external origins, such as the environment, the community, regulators, politicians, suppliers, and customers. They include:
Individuals face many of the same organizational risks outlined here, as well as health risks, mortality or longevity risks, and property and casualty risks. Risks are not necessarily independent. because many risks arise as a result of other risks; risk interactions can be extremely non-linear and harmful. For example, fluctuations in the interest rate cause changes in the value of the derivative transactions but could also impact the creditworthiness of the counterparty. Another example might occur with an emerging-market counterparty, where there is country and possibly currency risk associated with the counterparty (however creditworthy it might otherwise be). |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Measuring and modifying risks
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-management-introduction
Drivers
To understand how to measure risk, we need to first understand what drives risk. Risk drivers are the fundamental global and domestic macroeconomic and industry factors that create risk.
Risk management can control some risks but not all. Metrics Common measures of risk:
It is difficult to measure rare events such as operational risk and default risk. Methods of Risk Modification There are four broad categories of risk modification. Risk prevention and avoidance. Completely avoiding risk sounds simple, but it may be difficult or sometimes impossible. Furthermore, does it even make sense to do so? Almost every risk has an upside. There is always a trade-off between risk and return. Risk acceptance. Risk can be mitigated internally through self-insurance or diversification. This is to bear the risk but do so in the most efficient manner possible. Risk transfer. This is to pass on a risk to another party, often in the form of an insurance policy. An insurer attempts to sell policies with risks that have low correlations and can be diversified away. Risk shifting. This refers to actions that change the distribution of risk outcomes. The principal device is a derivative which can be used to shift risk across the probability distribution and from one party to another. There are two categories of derivatives: forward commitments and contingent claims. The primary determinant of which method is best for modifying risk is weighing the benefits against the costs, with consideration for the overall final risk profile and adherence to risk governance objectives. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Major Return Measures
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
There are various types of return measures.
Holding Period Return
Refer to Reading 6 for a detailed discussion of this return measure. Arithmetic or Mean Return
Refer to Reading 7 for a detailed discussion of this return measure. Geometric Mean Return
Refer to Reading 7 for a detailed discussion of this return measure. Money-Weighted Return or Internal Rate of Return The dollar-weighted rate of return is essentially the internal rate of return (IRR) on the portfolio. Refer to Reading 6 for a detailed discussion of this return measure. Annualized Return Annualizing returns allows for comparison among different assets and over different time periods.
where c is the number of periods in a year and rperiod is the rate of return per period. Example Monthly return: 0.6%. The annualized return is (1 + 0.6%)12 - 1 = 7.44%. Portfolio Return The expected return on a portfolio of assets is the market-weighted average of the expected returns on the individual assets in the portfolio.
where Rp is the return on the portfolio, Ri is the return on asset i and wi is the weighting of component asset i (that is, the share of asset i in the portfolio). Other Major Return Measures 1. A gross return is the return before any fees, expense, taxes, etc. A net return is the return after deducting all fees and expenses from the gross return. 2. Different types of investments generate different types of income and have different tax implications. For example, in the U.S. the interest income is fully taxable at an investor's marginal tax rate while capital gains are taxed at a much lower rate. Therefore, many investors therefore use the after-tax return to evaluate mutual fund performance. 3. The nominal return and the real return are two ways to measure how well an investment is performing. The real return takes into consideration the effects of inflation when calculating how much buying power has changed. 4. An investor can also use leverage to amplify his expected return (and risk). |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Variance and Covariance of Returns
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
Investment is all about reward versus variability (risk). The return measures the reward of an investment and dispersion is a measure of investment risk.
The variance is a measure of how spread out a distribution is. It is computed as the average squared deviation of each number from its mean. The formula for the variance in a population is: where μ is the mean and N is the number of scores. To compute variance in a sample:
where m is the sample mean. The formula for the standard deviation is very simple: it is the square root of the variance. It is the most commonly used measure of spread. The standard deviation of a portfolio is a function of:
In a two-asset portfolio:
The maximum amount of risk reduction is predetermined by the correlation coefficient. Thus, the correlation coefficient is the engine that drives the whole theory of portfolio diversification. Example with perfect positive correlation (assume equal weights): What is the standard deviation of a portfolio (E), assuming the following data? σ1 = 0.1, w1 = 0.5, σ2 = 0.1, w2 = 0.5, ρ12 = 1 Solution: Cov12 = σ1 x σ2 x ρ12 = 0.1 x 0.1 x 1 = 0.01 Standard Deviation of Portfolio [0.52 x 0.12 + 0.52 x 0.12 + 2 x 0.5 x 0.5 x 0.01]1/2 = 0.10 (perfect correlation) If there are three securities in the portfolio, its standard deviation is:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Historical Return and Risk
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
The textbook examines the historical risk and return for the three main asset categories (1926 - 2008).
T-bills: the safest investment on earth. The price paid for this safety is steep: the return is only 3.7%, which is barely above the inflation rate of 3.0% for the period. Further, although many academicians consider T-bills to be "riskless," a quick perusal of the T-bill graph shows considerable variation of return, meaning that you cannot depend on a constant income stream. This risk is properly reflected in the standard deviation of 3.1%. The best that can be said for the performance of T-bills is that they keep pace with inflation in the long run. Long-term bonds carry one big risk: interest rates risk. The longer the maturity of the bond the worse the damage. For bearing this risk, investors are rewarded with another 1.5% of long-term return. In the long run, investors can expect a real return (inflation-adjusted) of about 2% with a standard deviation of 10%. The rewards of stocks are considerable: a real return of greater than 6%. This return does not come free, of course. The standard deviation is 20%. You can lose more than 40% in a bad year; during the calendar years 1929-32 the inflation-adjusted ("real") value of this investment class decreased by almost two-thirds. $1 in 1900 would have grown to $582 in 2008 if invested in stocks, only $9.90 if invested in bonds, and to $2.90 if invested in T-bills. The message is clear: stocks are to be held for the long term. Don't worry too much about the short-term volatility of the markets; in the long run stocks will almost always have higher returns than bonds. Stocks have outperformed bonds consistently over long periods of time. However, stocks are much riskier and investors demand compensation for bearing the risk. The question is: is the premium too big? Other Investment Characteristics Two assumptions are usually made when investors perform investment analysis using mean and variance.
Is normality a good approximation of returns? In fact, returns are not quite normally distributed. The biggest departure from normality is that extremely bad returns are more likely than predicted by the normal distribution (fat tails).
There are operational limitations of the market that affect the choice of investments. One such limitation is liquidity, which affects the cost of trading. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Risk Aversion and Portfolio Selection
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
Risk Aversion
Every investor wants to maximize the investment returns for a given level of risk. Risk refers to the uncertainty of future outcomes. Risk aversion relates to the notion that investors as a rule would rather avoid risk. Given a choice of two investments with equal returns, risk-averse investors will select the investment with lower risk. Investors are risk-averse. Consequently, investors will demand a risk premium for taking on additional levels of risk. The more risk-averse the investor, the more of a premium he or she will demand prior to taking on risk. Investors who do not demand a premium for risk are said to be risk-neutral (e.g., willing to place both a large and small bet on the flip of a coin and be indifferent) and those investors that enjoy risk are said to be risk seekers (e.g., people who buy lottery tickets despite the knowledge that for every $1 spent, on average they will get less than $0.1 back). Example Three investors, Sam, Mike, and Mary are considering two investments: A and B. Investment A is the less risky of the two, requiring an investment of $1,000 with an expected rate of return at 10%. Investment B also requires an investment of $1,000 and has an expected return of 10% but appears to have considerably more variability in potential returns than A. Sam requires a return of 14%, Mike requires 10%, and Mary seeks only an 8% return. Question: Given the information above, which of the three investors is considered risk-averse? Solution: Only Sam would be considered risk-averse. He is the only investor who demands a premium of return given the higher risk level. Mike would be considered risk-neutral since he demands no premium in return (despite the higher risk) and Mary would be considered a risk-seeker since she, in fact, will accept less return for a riskier situation. Risk aversion implies that there is a positive relationship between expected returns (ER) and expected risk (Es), and that the risk return line (CML and SML) is upward-sweeping. Evidence that suggests that individuals are generally risk-averse:
Utility Theory
Although investors differ in their risk tolerance, they should be consistent in their selection of any portfolio in terms of the risk-return trade-off. Because risk can be quantified as the sum of the variance of the returns over time, it is possible to assign a utility score (aka utility value, utility function) to any portfolio by subtracting its variance from its expected return to yield a number that would be commensurate with an investor's tolerance for risk, or a measure of their satisfaction with the investment. Because risk aversion is not an objectively measurable quantity, there is no unique equation that would yield such a quantity, but an equation can be selected, not for its absolute measure, but for its comparative measure of risk tolerance. One such equation is the following utility formula:
where A is the risk aversion coefficient (a number proportionate to the amount of risk aversion of the investor). It is posi... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Portfolio Risk
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
Consider two mutual funds, D (specialized in bonds and debt securities) and E (specialized in equity). The weight of mutual fund D in the portfolio is wD and the weight of mutual fund E is wE, and their returns are rD and rE.
Expected return of the portfolio: E(rp) = wD E(rD) + wE E(rE) Variance of the portfolio: σp2 = wD 2σD2 + wE2 σE2 + 2 wD wE Cov(rD, rE) = (wDσD)2 + (wEσE)2 + 2 (wDσD) (wEσE) ρDE = (wDσD + wEσE)2 + 2 (wDσD) (wEσE) (ρDE - 1) = (wDσD - wEσE)2 + 2 (wDσD) (wEσE) (ρDE + 1) If the two assets are not perfectly positively correlated, the standard deviation of the portfolio is less than the weighted average of the standard deviations of the assets. Covariance of returns measures the degree to which the rates of return on two securities move together over time.
The magnitude of the covariance depends on the magnitude of the individual stocks' standard deviations and the relationship between their co-movements. The covariance is an absolute measure of movement and is measured in return units squared. As the magnitude of the covariance is affected by the variability of return of each individual security, covariance cannot be used to compare across different pairs of securities. The measure can be standardized by dividing the covariance by the standard deviations of the two securities being tested. p(1,2) = cov(1,2)/σ1σ2 Rearranging the terms gives: cov(1,2) = p(1,2)σ1σ2. The term p(1,2) is called the correlation coefficient between the returns of securities 1 and 2. The correlation coefficient has no units. It is a pure measure of the co-movement of the two stocks' returns. It varies in the range of -1 to 1. How should you interpret the correlation coefficient?
Example Two risky assets, A and B, have the following scenarios of returns:
What is the covariance between the returns of A and B? The expected return is a probability-weighted average of the returns. Using this definition, the expected retu... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Efficient Frontier
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
The mean-variance portfolio theory says that any investor will choose the optimal portfolio from the set of portfolios that:
Again, consider a situation where you have two stocks to choose from: A and B. You can invest your entire wealth in one of these two securities. Or you can invest 10% in A and 90% in B, or 20% in A and 80%in B, or 70% in A and 30% in B, or... There are a huge number of possible combinations even in the simple case of two securities. Imagine the different combinations you have to consider when you have thousands of stocks. The minimum-variance frontier shows the minimum variance that can be achieved for a given level of expected return. To construct the minimum-variance frontier of a portfolio:
The outcome of risk-return combinations generated by portfolios of risky assets gives you the minimum variance for a given rate of return. Logically, any set of combinations formed by two risky assets with less than perfect correlation will lie inside the triangle XYZ and will be convex. Investors will never want to hold a portfolio below the minimum variance point. They will always get higher returns along the positively sloped part of the minimum-variance frontier. The efficient frontier is the set of mean-variance combinations from the minimum-variance frontier where, for a given risk, no other portfolio offers a higher expected return.
Any point beneath the efficient frontier is inferior to points above. Moreover, any points along the efficient frontier are, by definition, superior to all other points for that combined risk-return tradeoff. Portfolios on the efficient frontier have different return and risk measures. As you move upward along the efficient frontier, both risk and the expected rate of return of the portfolio increase, and no one portfolio can dominate any other on the efficient frontier. An investor will target a portfolio on the efficient frontier on the basis of his attitude toward risk and his utility curves. The concept of efficient frontier narrows down the options of the different portfolios from which the investor may choose. For example, portfolios at points A and B offer the same risk, but the one at point A offers a higher return for the same risk. No rational investor will hold the portfolio at point B and therefore we can ignore it. In this case, A dominates B. In the same way, C dominates D. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Optimal Portfolio
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-i
The efficient frontier only considers the investments in risky assets. However, investors may choose to invest in a risk-free asset, which is assumed to have an expected return commensurate with an asset that has no standard deviation (i.e., zero variance) around the expected return. That is, a risk-free asset's expected return is entirely certain; it is known as the risk-free rate of return (RFR). Therefore, a risk-free asset lies on the vertical axis of a portfolio graph.
When a risk-free asset is combined with a risky portfolio, a graph of possible portfolio risks-return combinations becomes a straight line between the two assets. Assume the proportion of the portfolio the investor places in the tangency portfolio P is wP:
The introduction of a risk-free asset changes the efficient frontier into a straight line. This straight efficient frontier line is called the Capital Market Line (CML) for all investors and the Capital Allocation Line (CAL) for one investor.
Investors will choose the highest CAL (i.e., the CAL tangent to the efficient frontier). This portfolio is the solution to the optimization problem of maximizing the slope of the CAL.
Now, the line rf-P dominates all portfolios on the original efficient frontier. Thus, this straight line becomes the new efficient frontier. Separation Theorem Investors make different financing decisions based on their risk preferences. The separation of the investment decision from the financing decision is called the separation theorem. The portfolio choice problem can be broken down into two tasks:
Optimal Investor Portfolio We can combine the efficient frontier and/or capital allocation line with indifference curves. The optimal portfolio is the portfolio that gives the investor the greatest possible utility.
This is portfolio selection without a risk-free asset:
This is portfolio selection with a risk-free asset:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Capital Market Theory
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-ii
Introduction of a Risk-Free Asset
Adding a risk-free asset to the investment opportunities present on the efficient frontier effectively adds the opportunity to both borrow and lend. A U.S. Treasury bill (T-bill) is a common risk-free security proxy. Buying a T-bill loans the U.S. government money. Selling a T-bill short effectively borrows money. The concept of a risk-free asset is a major element in developing Capital Market Theory (CMT). Adding risk-free assets integrates investment and financing decisions. With risk-free asset:
The Capital Market Line Introducing risk-free assets creates a set of expected return-risk possibilities that did not exist previously. The new risk-return trade-off is a straight line tangent to the efficient frontier at the market portfolio (point M) with a vertical intercept at the risk-free rate of return, Rf. This line is called the Capital Market Line (CML).
The introduction of the risk-free asset significantly changes the Markowitz efficient set of portfolios. Investors are better off because they have improved investment opportunities. This new line leads all investors to invest in the same risky portfolio, the market portfolio. That is, all investors make the same investment decision. They can, however, attain their desired risk preferences by adjusting the weight of the market portfolio in their portfolios.
The Market Portfolio The market portfolio of risky securities, M, is the highest point of tangency between the line emanating from Rf and the efficient frontier and is the singular optimal risky portfolio. In equilibrium, all risky assets must be in portfolio M because all investors are assumed to arrive at, and hold, the same risky portfolio. All assets are included in portfolio M in proportion to their market value. For example, if the market for Google stock was 2 percent of the market value of all risky assets, Google would constitute 2 percent of the market value of portfolio M. Therefore, 2 percent of the market value of each investor's portfolio of risky assets would be Google. Think of portfolio M as a broad market index such as the S&P 500 Index. The market portfolio is, of course, a risky portfolio; its risk is designated σM. Portfolio M in a Global Context. In theory, the market portfolio (M) should include all risky assets worldwide, both financial and real, in their proper proportions. It has been estimated that the value of non-U.S. assets exceeds 60 percent of the world total. Further, U.S. equities make up only about 10 percent of total world assets. Therefore, international diversification is important. Portfolio M and Diversification. Because the market portfolio includes all risky assets, portfolio M is by definition c... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Pricing of Risk and Computation of Expected Return
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-ii
Systematic Risk and Unsystematic Risk
Total risk is measured as the standard deviation of security returns. It has two components:
Systematic risk is priced, and investors are compensated for holding assets or portfolios based only on that investment's systematic risk. Investors do not receive any return for accepting unsystematic risk. Return-Generating Models A return-generating model tries to estimate the expected return of a security based on certain parameters. Both the market model and CAPM are single-factor models. The common, single factor is the return on the market portfolio. Multifactor models describe the return on an asset in terms of the risk of the asset with respect to a set of factors. Such models generally include systematic factors, which explain the average returns of a large number of risky assets. Such factors represent priced risk, risk which investors require an additional return for bearing. According to the type of factors used, there are three categories of multifactor models:
Here is a two-factor macroeconomic model.
where
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. The Capital Asset Pricing Model
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-ii
Assumptions of the CAPM
The assumptions of the CAPM include:
The CAPM Capital market theory builds on portfolio theory. CAPM refers to the capital asset pricing model. It is used to determine the required rate of return for any risky asset. In the discussion about the Markowitz efficient frontier, the assumptions are:
The CAPM uses the SML or security market line to compare the relationship between risk and return. Unlike the CML, which uses standard deviation as a risk measure on the X axis, the SML uses the market beta, or the relationship between a security and the marketplace.
The use of beta enables an investor to compare the relationship between a single security and the market return rather than a single security with each and every other security (as Markowitz did). Consequently, the risk added to a market portfolio (or a fully diversified set of securities) should be reflected in the security's beta. The expected return for a security in a fully diversified portfolio should be:
E(RM) - Rf is the market risk premium, while the risk premium of the security is calculated by β[E(RM) - Rf]. Note that the "expected" and the "required" returns mean the same thing. The expected return based on the CAPM is exactly the return an investor requires on the security.
The SML represents the required rate of return, given the systematic risk provided by the security. If the expected rate of return exceeds this amount, then the security provides an investment opportunity for the investor. The difference between the expected and required return is called the alpha (α) or ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Applications of the CAPM
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #portfolio-management #risk-and-return-part-ii
Estimate of Expected Return. Apply the CAPM formula to calculate the expected return of an asset or project.
Portfolio Performance Evaluation. Four ratios are commonly used for this purpose.
If an investor holds a portfolio that is not fully diversified, total risk matters. Sharpe ratio and M-squared are appropriate performance measures in such cases. On the other hand, if the portfolio is well-diversified, Treynor ratio and Jensen's alpha are relevant, as only the systematic risk of the portfolio matters. Security Characteristic Line. A security characteristic line (SCL) graphs the relationship between the excess market return and excess security return.
While there is only one SML, there are many different SCLs for securities with different betas. Security Selection. Overvalued and undervalued securities are those securities that do not lie on the SML line. By definition, securities that are efficiently priced should fall directly on the (calculated) SML line. If a security is above the line it is deemed undervalued since it is providing more expected return than what is demanded for that risk level. Securities falling below the SML line, on the other hand, provides less return than the market demands. Securities that fall below the SML are considered overvalued. In the former case, the security price will be bid up, such that the expected return declines and the security falls back to the SML line. In a situation where the security is overvalued, the security price declines until the expected return rises.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Investment Policy Statement and its Major Components
#basics-of-portfolio-planning-and-construction #cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management
The first step of the portfolio management process is to develop a policy statement. The statement covers the types of risks the investor is willing to assume along with the investment goals and constraints. It should focus on the investor's short-term and long-term needs, familiarity with capital market history, and expectations and constraints. Periodically the investor will need to review, update, and change the policy statement.
A policy statement should incorporate an investor's objectives (risk and return) and constraints. It should address the following issues:
Moreover, the policy statement should attempt to answer the following questions:
A policy statement is like a road map: it forces investors to understand their own needs and constraints and to articulate them within the construct of realistic goals. It not only helps investors understand the risks and costs of investing, but also guides the actions of portfolio managers. Performance cannot be judged without an objective standard. The policy statement should state the performance standards by which the portfolio's performance will be judged and specify the specific benchmark which represents the investor's risk preferences. The portfolio should be measured against the stated benchmark rather than the portfolio's overall performance. Major components of an IPS include an introduction, statement of purpose, duties and responsibilities, procedures, investment objectives, constraints and guidelines, evaluation and review, and appendices. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Investment Risk and Return Objectives, and Risk Tolerance
#basics-of-portfolio-planning-and-construction #cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management
The investor's objectives are his or her investment goals expressed in terms of both risk and return. Why?
Investment firms survey clients to gauge their risk tolerance. Risk tolerance is an investor's attitude toward risk. It is segmented into ability and willingness to assume risk.
The investment adviser should work with the investor and reach a conclusion about the investor's risk tolerance consistent with the lower of the two factors (ability and willingness). Risk objectives are specifications for portfolio risk that reflect the risk tolerance of the client. Quantitative risk objectives can be stated on an absolute or a relative basis. For example:
Return objectives can be stated in terms of absolute or a relative percentage return, or other terms. For example:
The return measure can be stated:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Investment Constraints
#basics-of-portfolio-planning-and-construction #cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management
The following constraints affect the investment plan:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Portfolio Construction
#basics-of-portfolio-planning-and-construction #cfa #cfa-level-1 #portfolio-management
An asset class is a group of securities that exhibit similar characteristics and behave similarly in the marketplace (risk-return relationship). Examples of asset classes are money market funds, fixed-income (bonds), equities (stocks), real estate, natural resources, precious metals, collectibles and insurance products. We can even further break down equity investments into additional sub-classes, such as large-cap, mid-cap and small-cap equities.
Asset classes are the building blocks of asset allocation, which is the process of choosing among various kinds of possible asset classes. Empirical studies have shown that 85-95% of a portfolio's total returns come from the asset allocation policy decision, not the selection of specific stocks and bonds. Asset allocation determines what percentage of your total portfolio you devote to the numerous asset classes available. A strategic asset allocation (SAA) involves an examination of capital markets, to gauge future investment returns, combined with an understanding of portfolio objectives, risk tolerance, and constraints, to distribute a portfolio's assets effectively and efficiently among several asset classes in order to achieve the best return possible within acceptable risk levels. SAA involves:
Steps toward an Actual Portfolio Risk budgeting is a process by which investment managers determine how much risks should be taken and how risk can be most effectively allocated across different asset classes. In addition to taking systematic risks, an investment committee may choose to take tactical asset allocation risks or security selection risks. The amount of return attributable to these decisions can be measured.
As time goes on, a client's asset allocation will drift from the target allocation; the amount of allowable drift as well as a rebalancing policy should be formalized. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Functions of the Financial System
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
Helping People Achieve Their Purposes Using the Financial System
The financial system helps people:
Determining Rate of Return The price in the financial system is the rate of return. It is the result of interaction of the broad forces of supply and demand. There are as many different prices (rates of return) as there are different types of assets in the financial system. For example, equities have higher rates of return than T-bills. All of the rates are determined in the financial system. Prices rapidly adjust to new information. The prevailing price is fair because it reflects all available information regarding the asset. Capital Allocation Efficiency In the financial markets investors distinguish good firms from bad firms. This lets the market channel capital to good firms and away from problem firms. Timely and accurate information is available on the price and volume of past transactions and the prevailing bid-price and ask-price. Such information facilitates the rapid flow of capital to its highest value uses. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Assets and Contracts
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
There are many different ways one can classify assets and contracts. The most common way is to classify them into one of these categories: debts, equities, currencies, derivatives (contracts), commodities, and real estate. In this subject we briefly describe the numerous assets and contracts available and provide a brief overview of each. Fixed-Income Investments These have a contractually mandated payment schedule. Their investment contacts promise specific payments at predetermined times. Investors who acquire fixed-income securities are really lenders to the issuers. Specifically, you lend some amount of money (the principal) to the borrower. In return, the borrower promises to make periodic interest payments and to pay back the principal at the maturity of the loan. Bonds, notes, bills, CDs, commercial paper, repo agreements, loan agreements, and mortgages are examples of fixed-income investments. Preferred stock is classified as a fixed-income security because its yearly payment is stipulated as either a coupon (e.g., 5% of the face value) or a stated dollar amount. Although preferred dividends are not legally binding (as are the interest payments on a bond), they are considered practically binding because of the credit implications of a missed dividend. Equities Equities differ from fixed-income securities because their returns are not contractual. They represent residual ownership in companies after all claims-including any fixed-income liabilities of the company - have been satisfied. Common stocks represent ownership of a firm. Owners of the common stock of a firm share in the company's successes and problems. A warrant allows the holder to purchase a firm's common stock from the firm at a specified price for a given time period. It provides the firm with future common stock capital when the holder exercises the warrant. Pooled Investments Rather than directly buying an individual stock or bond, you may choose to acquire these investments indirectly by buying shares in an investment company that owns a portfolio of individual stocks, bonds, or a combination of the two. People invest in pooled investment vehicles to benefit from the investment management services of their managers. Examples of these pooled investments include money market funds, bond funds, stock funds, balanced funds, etc. Currencies The currency market is a worldwide decentralized over-the-counter financial market for the trading of currencies. Market participants include commercial banks, central banks, retail brokers, etc. Contracts Financial contracts include the following:
Commodities Commodities include agricultural products, energy, metals, etc. Commodities complement investment opportunities offered by shares of corporation that extensively use these raw materials in their production processes. Real Assets Real assets include tangible assets such as real estate, airplanes, machinery, or lumber stands. They are often illiquid and have high transaction costs compared to stocks and bonds. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Financial Intermediaries
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
Financial intermediaries are institutions that function as the line of communication between buyers and sellers in the financial system. Functioning as a middleman, a financial intermediary seeks to match investors who have specific financial goals with investments opportunities that can aid in the achievement of those goals.
Brokers, Exchanges, and Alternative Trading Systems A broker executes trade orders on behalf of a customer. A block broker helps fill larger orders. Investment banks help their corporate clients raise capital by issuing shares or bonds. They also help their corporate clients identify and acquire other companies. An exchange is like a market where stocks, bonds, options and futures, and commodities are traded. Most exchanges offer different categories of membership and regulate their members' behavior when trading on the exchange. They also regulate the issuers that list their securities on the exchange. Alternative trading systems (ATSs) are non-exchange trading venues that bring together buyers and sellers of securities. ATSs do not exercise regulatory authority over their subscribers and do not discipline subscribers other than by exclusion from trading. For example, an electronic communication network (ECN) connects major brokerages and individual traders so that they can trade directly between themselves without having to go through a middleman. Dark pools are ATSs that don't display their orders (which are usually very large). Dealers A dealer trades for its own accounts. Individual dealers provide liquidity to investors by trading the securities for themselves. They buy or sell with one client and hope to do the offsetting transaction later with another client. In practice, most brokerages are in fact broker-dealer firms. That is, as a broker, the brokerage conducts transactions on behalf of clients, and, as a dealer, it trades on its own account. In the U.S. most broker-dealers must register with the SEC. Securitizers Securitization is a structured finance process that distributes risk by aggregating assets in a pool (often by selling assets to a special purpose entity) then issuing new securities backed by the assets and their cash flows. The securities are sold to investors who share the risk and reward from those assets. In most securitized investment structures, the investors' rights to receive cash flows are divided into "tranches": senior tranche investors lower their risk of default in return for lower interest payments while junior tranche investors assume a higher risk in return for higher interest. Financial intermediaries securitize many assets, such as mortgages, car loans, credit card receivables, and banks loans. Depository Institutions and Other Financial Corporations They accept monetary deposits from savers and investors, and then lend these deposits to borrowers. Both the depositors and borrowers benefit from the services they provide. Depository institutions also provide other services, such as transaction services, credit services, etc. Insurance Companies Insurance involves pooling funds from many insured entities (e.g., policyholders) in order to pay for relatively uncommon but severely devastating losses which can occur to these entities. The insured entities are therefore protected from risk for a fee. In other words, risks are transferred from these entities to the insurance company. The insurance company connects customers who want to insure against risks with investors who are willing to bear those risks. Insurance companies make money in two ways:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Positions
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
A long position is owning or holding securities or contracts. For example, an owner of 100 shares of Apple common stock is said to be "long the stock." Being long indicates an expectation of rising share/contract prices.
A short sale allows investors to profit from a decline in a security's price if they believe the security is overpriced. In this procedure an investor (the seller) borrows shares of stock from another investor (the lender) through a broker and sells the shares. The lender keeps the proceeds of the sale as collateral. Later, the investor (the short seller) must repurchase the shares in the market in order to return the shares that were borrowed (covering the short position) to the lender. If the stock price has fallen, the shares will be repurchased at a lower price than that at which they were initially sold, and the short seller reaps a profit equal to the drop in price times the number of shares sold short. For options, to be long means you are the buyer of the option. To be short means you are the seller of the option. Since the put option contract holder (long) has the right to sell the underlying to the option writer, he or she is actually short the underlying instrument. The profit in short selling is limited to the value of the security but the loss is theoretically unlimited. In practice, as the price of a security rises, the short seller will receive a margin call from the broker, demanding that the short seller either cover his short position (by purchasing the security) or provide additional cash in order to meet the margin requirement for the security (which effectively places a limit on the amount that can be lost). Leveraged Positions Margin transactions occur when investors who purchase stocks borrow part of the purchase price of the stock from their brokers and leave purchased stocks with the brokerage firm because the securities are used as collateral for the loan. The interest rate of the margin credit charged by the broker is typically 1.5% above the rate charged by the bank making the loan. The bank rate (the call money rate) is normally about 1% below the prime rate. The market value of the collateral stock minus the amount borrowed is called the investor's equity. Investors can achieve greater upside potential, but they also expose themselves to greater downside risk. The leverage equals 1/margin%. Buying stocks on margin increases the investment's financial risk and thus requires a higher rate of return.
Example Suppose an investor initially pays $6,000 toward the purchase of $10,000 worth of stock ($100 shares at $100 per share), borrowing the remaining from the broker. The maintenance margin is set at 30%. The initial percentage margin is 60%. If the price of the stock falls to $57.14, the value of his stock will be $5,714. Since the loan is $4,000, the percentage margin now is (5,714 - 4,000) / 5714 = 29.9%. The investor will get a margin call. When investors acquire stock or other investments on margin, they are increasing the financial risk of the investment beyond the risk inherent in the security itself. They should increase their required rate of return accordingly. Return on margin transact... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Orders
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
Orders are instructions to trade. They always specify instrument, side (buy or sell), and quantity.
Orders usually also provide several other instructions. Execution Instructions These indicate how to fill the order. Market orders are simple buy or sell orders that are to be executed immediately at current market prices. They provide immediate liquidity for someone willing to accept the prevailing market price. A limit order is an order that sets the maximum or minimum at which you are willing to buy or sell a particular stock. For instance, if you want to buy stock ABC, which is trading at $12, you can set a limit order for $10. This guarantees that you will pay no more than $10 to buy this stock. Once the stock reaches $10 or less, you will automatically buy a predetermined amount of shares. On the other hand, if you own stock ABC and it is trading at $12, you could place a limit order to sell it at $15. This guarantees that the stock will be sold at $15 or more. The primary advantage of a limit order is that it guarantees that the trade will be made at a particular price; however, it's possible that your order will not be executed at all if the limit price is not reached. Traders choose order submission strategies on the basis of how quickly they want to trade, the prices they are willing to accept, and the consequences of failing to trade. Validity Instructions These indicate when the order may be filled. A day order (the most common) is a market or limit order that is in force from the time the order is submitted to the end of the day's trading session. A good-till-canceled order requires a specific canceling order. It can persist indefinitely (although brokers may set some limits, for example, 90 days). An immediate-or-cancel order (IOC) will be immediately executed or canceled by the exchange. Unlike a fill-or-kill order, IOC orders allow for partial fills. An order may be specified on the close or on the open, then it is entered in an auction but has no effect otherwise. Different types of orders allow you to be more specific about how you'd like your broker to fulfill your trades. When you place a stop or limit order, you are telling your broker that you don't want the market price (the current price at which a stock is trading), but that you want the stock price to move in a certain direction before your order is executed. With a stop order, your trade will be executed only when the security you want to buy or sell reaches a particular price (the stop price). Once the stock has reached this price, a stop order essentially becomes a market order and is filled. For instance, if you own stock ABC, which currently trades at $20, and you place a stop order to sell it at $15, your order will only be filled once stock ABC drops below $15. Also known as a "stop-loss order," this allows you to limit your losses. However, this type of order can also be used to guarantee profits. For example, assume that you bought stock XYZ at $10 per share and now the stock is trading at $20 per share. Placing a stop order at $15 will guarantee profits of approximately $5 per share, depending on how quickly the market order can be filled. Stop orders are particularly advantageous to investors who are unable to monitor their stocks for a period of time, and brokerages may even set these stop orders for no charge. One disa... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Primary Security Markets
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
The primary markets are those in which new issues of bonds, preferred stock, or common stock are sold by government units, municipalities, or companies to acquire new capital.
There are two important rules in the primary capital markets:
New stock issues are divided into two groups:
A rights issue is an option that a company can opt for to raise capital under a secondary market offering or by using a seasoned equity offering of shares to raise money. It is a special form of shelf offering or shelf registration. With the issued rights, existing shareholders have the privilege of buying a specified number of new shares from the firm at a specified price within a specified time. Government bond issues are sold at Federal Reserve auctions. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Secondary Security Market and Contract Market Structures
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
The secondary markets permit trading in outstanding issues; that is, stocks or bonds already sold to the public are traded between current and potential owners.
Secondary markets support primary markets.
Trading Sessions Securities exchanges differ in when stocks are traded. In a call market, trading for individual stocks takes place at specified times. The intent is to gather all the bids and asks for the stock and attempt to arrive at a single price where the quantity demanded is as close as possible to the quantity supplied.
In a continuous market, trades occur any time the market is open. Stocks are priced either by auction or by dealers. In an auction market, there are sufficient willing buyers and sellers to keep the market continuous. In a dealer market, enough dealers are willing to buy or sell the stock. Please note that dealers may exist in some auction markets. These dealers provide temporary liquidity and ensure market continuity if the market does not have enough activity. Although many exchanges are considered continuous, they (e.g., NYSE) also employ a call-market mechanism on specific occasions. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Well-Functioning Financial Systems
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
Well-functioning financial systems have the following characteristics:
A well-functioning financial system promotes wealth by ensuring that capital allocation decisions are well-made. It also promotes wealth by allowing people to share risks associated with valuable products that would otherwise not be undertaken. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 9. Market Regulation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-46-market-organization-and-structure
Regulators generally seek to promote fair and orderly markets in which traders can trade at prices that accurately reflect fundamental values without incurring excessive transaction costs. Governmental agencies and self-regulating organizations of practitioners provide regulatory services that attempt to make markets safer and more efficient.
The objectives of market regulation are to:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Index Definition and Calculations of Value and Returns
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #has-images #reading-47-security-market-indices
A security market index is a means to measure the value of a set of securities in a target market, market segment, or asset class. The constituent securities selected for inclusion in the security market index are intended to represent the target market.
There are usually two versions of the same index:
Single Period Returns The single-period price return of an index is the weighted average of the price returns of the individual securities: or
Since the total return of an index includes price appreciation and income, we need to add the weighted average of income to the above formula to calculate the single-period total return:
or Multiple-Period Returns The single-period returns should be linked geometrically. Similarly, to calculate the total return over multiple periods:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Index Construction and Management
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #has-images #reading-47-security-market-indices
The steps to construct and manage a security market index:
Price Weighting This is an arithmetic average of current prices. Index movements are influenced by the differential prices of the components. The weight of each security is calculated using this formula:
The index itself is computed by:
Example Shares of firm A sell for $100 and shares of firm B sell for $25. The initial price index is (100 + 25) / 2 = 62.5. The divisor is therefore 2.
Price-weighting is simple, but a price-weighted index has a downward bias.
Both the Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) and the Nikkei-Dow Jones Average use this method to weight an index. Equal Weighting All stocks carry equal weight regardless of their price or market value. A $1 stock is as important as a $10 stock, and a firm with a $200 million market value is the same as one with a $200 billion value. The actual movements in the index are typically based on the arithmetic average of the percent changes in price or value for the stocks in the index: each percent change has equal weight. Such an index can be used by individuals who randomly select stock for their portfolios and invest the same dollar amount in each stock. The weight of each security is calculated using this formula: ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Uses of Market Indices
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-47-security-market-indices
Security market indices are used:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Different Types of Security Market Indices
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-47-security-market-indices
Equity Indices There are different types of equity indices. A broad market index represents an entire given equity market. Examples include the Russell 3000, the Wilshire 5000 Total Market Index, etc. Local indices of individual countries lack consistency in sample selection, weighting, or computational procedures. Global equity indexes are created to solve this comparability problem. A multi-market index represents multiple security markets. For example, the Dow Jones World Stock Index includes 2,200 companies in 33 countries. A sector index measures the performance of a narrow market segment, such as the biotechnology sector. It can be used to determine if a portfolio manager is good at sector allocation or not. It can also be used to track the performance of sector-specific funds. Style strategies focus on the underlying characteristics common to certain investments. Growth is a different style than value, and large capitalization investing is a different style than small stock investing. A growth strategy may focus on high price-to-earnings stocks and a value strategy on low price-to-earnings stocks. Style indices are created to represent such securities. Fixed Income Indices The creation and computation of bond-market indices is more difficult than that for a stock market series.
All bond indices indicate total rates of return for the portfolio of bonds, including price change, accrued interest, and coupon income reinvested. They are relatively new and not widely published. Most indices are market-value weighted. Bond indices can be categorized based on their broad characteristics, such as type of issuer, currency, maturity, and credit rating. For example, there are different indices for government bonds, high-yield bonds, corporate bonds, and mortgage-backed securities. Commodity Indices There are five major commodity sectors: energy, grains, metals, food and fiber, and livestock. A commodity price index is a fixed-weight index of selected commodity prices, which may be based on spot or futures prices. It is designed to be representative of the broad commodity asset class or a specific subset of commodities, such as energy or metals.
Real Estate Investment Trust Indices Types of real estate indices include appraisal indices, repeat sales indices, and REIT indices which track the performance of publicly traded REITs. Hedge Funds Indices There are many indices that track the hedge fund industry. Since hedge funds are illiquid, heterogeneous, and ephemeral, it is really hard to construct a satisfactory index. Funds' participation in an index is voluntary, leading to self-selection bias because those funds th... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Concept of Market Efficiency
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-48-market-efficiency
An efficient capital market is one in which security prices adjust rapidly to the arrival of new information and the current prices of securities reflect all information about the securities. Therefore, it is also called an informationally efficient capital market.
Why should capital markets be efficient? Competition is the source of efficiency, and price changes should be independent and random.
In an efficient market, the expected returns implicit in the current price of the security should reflect its risk. Investors buying the security should receive a return that is consistent with the perceived risk of the security. In an efficient capital market the majority of portfolio managers cannot beat a buy-and-hold policy on a risk-adjusted basis. An index fund which simply attempts to match the market at the lowest cost is preferable to an actively managed portfolio. Market Value versus Intrinsic Value
In an efficient market, the two values should be very close or the same. In other words, in an efficient market at any point in time the actual price of a security will be a good estimate of its intrinsic value. Though market value and intrinsic value may differ over time, the discrepancy will get corrected as new information arrives. In an inefficient market, the two values may differ significantly. Factors Affecting a Market's Efficiency Some factors contribute to and some impede the degree of efficiency in a financial market.
Transaction costs and information-acquisition costs should also be considered when evaluating market efficiency. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Forms of Market Efficiency
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-48-market-efficiency
There are three versions of the Efficient Market Hypothesis (EMH); they differ in their notions of what is meant by the term "all available information."
Implications of EMHs Technical Analysis The assumptions of technical analysis directly oppose the notion of efficient markets.
Therefore, technical analysts believe that good traders can detect the significant stock price changes before others do. However, as confirmed by most studies, the capital market is weak-form efficient as prices fully reflect all market information as soon as the information becomes public. Though prices may not be adjusted perfectly in an efficient market, it is unpredictable whether the market will over-adjust or under-adjust at any time. Therefore, technical analysts should not generate abnormal returns and no technical trading system should have any value. Fundamental Analysis Fundamental analysts believe that:
Therefore, by accurately estimating the intrinsic value, a fundamental analyst can achieve abnormal returns by making superior market timing decisions or acquiring undervalued securities. Fundamental analysis involves aggregate market analysis, industry analysis, company analysis, and portfolio management. However, using historical data to estimate the relevant variables is as much an art and a product of hard... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Market Pricing Anomalies
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-48-market-efficiency
Are the hypotheses supported by the data? Are there market patterns that lead to abnormal returns more often than not?
A market anomaly is a security price distortion in the market that seems to contradict the efficient market hypothesis. There are different categories of market anomalies. Time-Series Anomalies Calendar anomalies raise the question of whether some regularities exist in the rates of return during the calendar year that would allow investors to predict returns on stocks. The January anomaly, also called small-firm-in-January effect, says that many people sell stocks that have declined in price during the previous months to realize their capital losses before the end of the tax year. Such investors do not put the proceeds from these sales back into the stock market until after the turn of the year. At that point the rush of demand for stock places an upward pressure on prices that results in the January effect.
The effect is said to show up most dramatically for the smallest firms because the small-firm group includes stocks with the greatest variability of prices during the year (and the group therefore includes a relatively large number of firms that have declined sufficiently to induce tax-loss selling). Another possible reason for the January effect on stock markets is strategic selling by institutional investors at the end of their reporting periods. Portfolio managers may be reluctant to report holdings of stocks in their annual reports that have performed poorly in the previous period. Therefore, the managers sell these stocks at the end of their accounting periods (usually the end of December). This so-called "window-dressing" was suggested as a source of the January effect by Haugen and Lakonishok (1988). Despite numerous studies, the January anomaly poses as many questions as it answers. Other calendar anomalies include the monthly effect, weekend or day-of-the-week effect, and intraday effect. Momentum and Overreaction Anomalies. The debate surrounding investor overreaction and contrarian investing is one of the most extensive and controversial areas of research in finance. The overreaction anomaly, evidenced by long-term reversals in stock returns, was first identified by De Bondt and Thaler (1985), who showed that stocks which have performed poorly in the past three to five years demonstrate superior performance over the next three to five years compared to stocks that have performed well in the past. The study provided evidence that abnormal excess returns could be gained by employing a strategy of buying past losers and selling short past winners, or the contrarian strategy. Although the overreaction anomaly and market momentum do seem to exist, researchers have argued that the existence of momentum is rational, and the additional return (based on the contrarian investment strategy) would come simply at the expense of increased risk. Cross-Sectional Anomalies If the semi-strong EMH is true, all securities should have equal risk-adjusted returns because security prices should reflect all public information that would influence the security's risk. Using public information, is it possible to determine what stocks will enjoy above-average, risk-adjusted returns? The size effect relates to the impact of size (measured by total market value) on risk-adjusted rates of return. Some researchers found that small firms outperformed large firms after considering risk and transaction costs. Basu's study concluded that publicly available P/E ratios conveyed valuable information, and that the risk-adjusted returns for stocks in the lowest P/E ratio quintile were superior to those in the highest P/E ratio quintile. This is known as the value effect. Fama and French found that both size and BV/MV ratio are significant when included toge... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Behavioral Finance
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #equity-market-organization-indices-and-market-efficiency #reading-48-market-efficiency
Some investors behave highly irrationally and make predictable errors. Behavior finance is a field of finance that proposes psychology-based theories to explain stock market anomalies. Within behavioral finance, it is assumed that the information structure and the characteristics of market participants systematically influence individuals' investment decisions as well as market outcomes. There have been many studies that have documented long-term historical phenomena in securities markets that contradict the efficient market hypothesis and cannot be captured plausibly in models based on perfect investor rationality. Behavioral finance attempts to fill the void.
Loss Aversion This is a theory that people value gains and losses differently and, asa result, will base decisions on perceived losses rather than perceived gains. Thus, if people were given two equal choices, one expressed in terms of possible losses and the other in possible gains, they would choose the former. Overconfidence Most people consider themselves to be better than average in most things they do. For example, 80% of drivers contend that they are better than "average" drivers. Is that really possible? Studies show that money managers, advisors, and investors are consistently overconfident in their ability to outperform the market. Most fail to do so, however. Other behavior theories include representativeness, gambler's fallacy, mental accounting, etc. Information Cascades Information cascading is defined as a situation in which an individual imitates the trades of other market participants and completely disregards his or her own private information. A related concept is herding, which is clustered trading that may or may not be based on information. Some researchers argue that institutional investors trade together because they receive correlated private information or infer private information from previous trades, and institutional herding helps prices more quickly reflect market information and improve market efficiency. The result is that trading does not incorporate information and prices can move away from fundamentals. Some researchers argue that information cascades help promote market efficiency. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Equity Securities in Global Financial Markets
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
Equity securities play a fundamental role in investment analysis and portfolio management. The importance of this asset class continues to grow on a global scale because of the need for equity capital in developed and emerging markets, technological innovation, and the growing sophistication of electronic information exchange. Given their absolute return potential and ability to impact the risk and return characteristics of portfolios, equity securities are of importance to both individual and institutional investors.
Global equity securities have offered an average annualized real return of 5% based on historical data, while the average annual real return is about 1% or 2% for government bills and bonds. However, equity securities are more volatile than government bills and bonds. They represent a key asset class for global investors because of their unique return and risk characteristics. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Types and Characteristics of Equity Securities
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
Common Shares
Common shares represent ownership shares in a corporation. The two most important characteristics of common shares are:
Each share of voting common stock entitles its owner to one vote on any matters of corporate governance that are put to a vote at the corporation's annual meeting. Shareholders who do not attend the annual meeting can vote by proxy, empowering another party to vote in their name. Statutory voting, also known as straight voting, is a procedure of voting for a company's directors in which each shareholder is entitled to one vote per share. For example, if you owned 100 shares, you would have 100 votes. Cumulative voting is another procedure of voting for a company's directors. Each shareholder is entitled to one vote per share times the number of directors to be elected. For example, if you owned 100 shares and there were three directors to be elected, you would have 300 votes. This is advantageous for individual investors because they can apply all of their votes toward one person. Common shares can be callable or putable. Callable common shares give the issuer the right to buy back the shares from shareholders at a pre-determined price. Putable common shares give shareholders the right to sell the shares back to the issuer at a pre-determined price. Preference Shares A preferred share, also called a preference share, has features similar to both equities and bonds.
Preferred dividends can be cumulative; that is, unpaid dividends cumulate and must be paid in full before any dividends may be paid to common shareholders. All passed dividends on a cumulative stock are dividends in arrears. A stock that doesn't have this feature is known as a noncumulative or straight preferred stock and any dividends passed are lost forever if not declared. The implication is that the dividend payments are at the company's discretion and are thus similar to payments made to common shareholders. Participating preferred shares offer the holders the opportunity to receive extra dividends if the company achieves some predetermined financial goals. The investors who purchased these shares receive their regular dividends regardless of how well or how poorly the company performs, assuming the company does well enough to make the annual dividend payments. If the company achieves predetermined sales, earnings, or profitability goals, the investors receive additional dividends. Most preferred shares are non-participating. Convertible preferred shares give the assurance of a fixed rate of return plus the opportunity for capital appreciation. The fixed-income component offers a steady income stream and some protection of capital. The option to convert these preferred shares into common shares gives the investor the opportunity to gain from a rise in share price. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Private versus Public Equity Securities
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
Private securities are not publicly traded. They don't have market-determined quoted prices, and they are highly illiquid.
The most common investment strategies are:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Investing in Non-Domestic Equity Securities
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
There are a variety of methods for investing in non-domestic equity securities.
Direct Investing Investors can buy and sell securities directly in foreign markets. However, they have to worry about currency conversions, unfamiliar market practices, and differences in accounting practices. Depository Receipts Depository Receipts (DRs) are domestically traded securities representing claims of shares of foreign stocks. Those shares are held in deposit in a local bank, which in turn issues DRs in the name of the foreign company. Investors buy and sell DRs in local currency and receive all dividends in local currency.
An unsponsored DR is issued by a broker/dealer or depository bank without the involvement of the company whose stock underlies the DR. A sponsored DR is issued with the cooperation of the company whose stock underlies the DR. These shares carry all the rights of the common shares, such as voting rights. A global depository receipt (GDR) is a DR issued outside the company's home country and outside the U.S. A GDR is very similar to an ADR. It is typically used to invest in companies from developing or emerging markets. An American depositary receipt (ADR) is a U.S. dollar-denominated DR that trades on a U.S. exchange. Sponsored ADRs are classified at three levels:
Other methods to invest in non-domestic equity securities include global registered shares and baskets of listed depository receipts. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Risk and Return Characteristics of Equity Securities
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
Return Characteristics
There are two main sources of equity securities' total return:
Investors who purchase non-domestic equities may incur foreign exchange gains or losses. Reinvestment income of dividends is also a source of return. Risk Characteristics The risk of an equity security is the uncertainty of its expected total return. The measurement of the risk is typically the standard deviation of its expected total return over a number of periods. Analysts use different methods to estimate an equity's expected return and risk. Different types of shares have different risk characteristics. Common shares are more risky than preferred shares. Some shares (e.g., callable) are more risky than other shares (e.g., putable). |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Equity Securities and Company Value
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-49-overview-of-equity-securities
Companies issue equity securities to raise capital and increase liquidity. The book value of a company's equity can be affected by its management directly, but the market value is determined by investors. Increases in book value may not be reflected in the company's market value. In fact, book value and market value are rarely equal.
Accounting Return on Equity ROE is net income (available to common shares) divided by the total book value of equity (common shares). The book value can be the book value at the beginning of the period or the average book value. Apparently management's accounting choices (e.g., FIFO versus LIFO) can have a big impact on computed ROEs. An increasing ROE is not always good. Investors should examine the source of changes in the company's net income and shareholders' equity over time to determine why its ROE is increasing. A company's price-to-book ratio can be used to indicate investors' expectations for the company's future cash flows generated by its positive net present investment opportunities. The ratio should be used to compare companies mainly in the same industry. The Cost of Equity and Investor's Required Rate of Return The cost of debt is simply the periodic coupon rate or interest rate. The cost of equity, which is usually used as a proxy for investors' minimum required rate of return, is difficult to estimate because there is no existing one. Two models can be used to estimate the cost of equity: DDM and CAPM. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Uses of Industry Analysis
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
Company analysis and industry analysis are closely interrelated. Company and industry analysis together can provide insight into sources of industry revenue growth and competitors' market shares and thus the future of an individual company's top-line growth and bottom-line profitability.
Industry analysis is useful for:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Approaches to Identifying Similar Companies
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
There are three main approaches to classifying companies:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Industry Classification Systems
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
Commercial industry classification systems include:
Various governmental agencies use a number of classification systems to facilitate the comparison of data over time and among countries that use the same system. These systems include:
The structures of these systems are very similar. The limitation of current classification systems is that the narrowest classification unit assigned to a company generally cannot be assumed to constitute its peer group for the purpose of detailed fundamental comparisons or valuation. Peer Group Analysis This is the practice of comparing a firm's results to those of similar firms. Commercial industry classification systems often provide a starting point for constructing a peer group. Start with companies in the same industry, review the subject company and its competitors' annual reports, and confirm that each comparable company's primary business activity is similar to that of the subject company. Useful questions to ask are:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Principles of Strategic Analysis
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
A business has to understand the dynamics of its industries and markets in order to compete effectively in the marketplace. Porter identifies five forces that dictate the rules of competition in each industry. These forces determine industry profitability because they influence the prices, costs, and required investment of firms in an industry.
The elements of a thorough industry analysis include the following: Barriers to Entry In theory, any firm should be able to enter and exit a market, and if free entry and exit exists, then profits always should be nominal. In reality, however, industries possess characteristics that protect the high profit levels of firms in the market and inhibit additional rivals from entering the market. These are barriers to entry. They are advantages that incumbents have relative to new entrants. The threat of entry in an industry depends on the height of entry barriers that are present. If entry barriers are low, the threat of entry is high and industry profitability is moderated. Generally, high barriers to entry can lead to better pricing and less competitive industry conditions. However, barriers to entry are not barriers to success, and high barriers to entry do not necessarily lead to good pricing power and attractive industry economics. Barriers to entry can also change over time. Industry Concentration Industry concentration is often, although not always, a sign that an industry may have pricing power and rational competition. Industry fragmentation is a much stronger signal, however, that the industry is competitive and pricing power is limited. Certainly there are important exceptions. There are industries that are concentrated with weak pricing power and there are also industries that are fragmented with strong pricing power. The level of industry concentration is just a guideline. Industry Capacity Tight capacity -> more pricing power Overcapacity -> price cutting The analyst should think not only about current capacity conditions but also about future changes in capacity levels: how long does it take for supply and demand to reach equilibrium? Are the tight supply conditions sustainable? In general it takes longer to shift physica... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. External Influences on Industry Growth, Profitability, and Risk
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
These external influences include:
Macroeconomic Influences GDP, interest rates, inflation, the availability of credit, etc. Technological Influences Established companies face the threat of technological obsolescence, while technological developments may also help established industries reinforce growth. Infant industries face the threat of a new product not being accepted by the marketplace. Demographic Influences Broad shifts in population distribution, age, and income can have very marked effects on different industries. For example, a greater role of sports in the lives of many Americans has increased demand for sports trauma orthopedics. In most cases, demographic shifts are easy to identify, because they occur over a very long time period. However, it is much harder to quantify such trends and determine their influence on a particular industry. Governmental Influences Government regulations, laws, and tax policies can have a marked influence on many industries. They may potentially increase or decrease an industry's prospects. In certain cases, government policies create new industries. For example, after the Firestone case, governments required the original auto manufacturers to submit all information about their cars, which created a new auto business intelligence software industry. Trade barriers established by governments support demand for specific domestic industries by fending off foreign competition (an example would be the steel industry in the U.S.). Social Influences Fashion changes tend to be short-term and less predictable. For example, new products in the cosmetics or film industries may enjoy a brief spark in demand, which will dissipate shortly. Lifestyle changes tend to be long-term and more predictable. For example, as a result of greater health consciousness, natural foods and nutritional products enjoyed a boom and hard liquor sales were depressed. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Company Analysis
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-50-introduction-to-industry-and-company-analysis
After an analyst has gained an understanding of a company's external environment, he/she can start company analysis. This includes analysis of the company's financial position, products and/or services, and its competitive strategy. The analyst should try to determine if the strategy is primarily defensive or offensive and how the company intends to implement the strategy. A firm can pursue one of the two basic types of competitive strategies: low cost or differentiation. To achieve abnormal profitability, a company should either incur low costs in its production process, or receive premium-to-average market price based on its products' differences preferential to customers. High profits will be possible only if the company with a cost advantage can sell its products at high-enough prices and if the company with a differentiation advantage can keep the costs of superior products sufficiently low. A checklist for company analysis includes a through investigation of:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Estimated Value and Market Price
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
Equity valuation models are used to estimate the intrinsic value of an equity security. By comparing the intrinsic value and market price, an analyst can draw one of three conclusions: the security is undervalued, fairly valued, or overvalued. Investment decisions are then made based on the comparison.
There are two uncertainties in this process:
Analysts often use more than one valuation model because of concerns about the applicability of any particular model and the variability in estimates that result from changes in inputs. The model should be kept as simple as possible. The goal is to minimize the inaccuracy of the forecast. There are three major categories of equity valuation models:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Present Value Models: The Dividend Discount Model
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
Under the DDM, the value of a common stock is the present value of all future dividends. If the stock is sold at some point in the future, its value at that time will be the present value of all future dividends. In fact, the buyer is paying for the remaining dividend stream. If a stock does not pay dividends for some early years, investors expect that at some point in the future the firm will start to pay dividends. Thus, valuation of stocks paying no dividends uses the same DDM approach, except that some of the early dividends are zero.
One-Year Holding Period Assume an investor wants to buy a stock, hold it for one year, and then sell it. To determine the value of the stock using DDM, the investor must estimate the dividend to be received during the period (D1), the expected sale price at the end of the holding period (P1), and the required rate of return (r). Then:
Multiple-Year Holding Period If the investor anticipates holding the stock for several years and then selling it, the valuation estimate is harder. You must forecast several future dividend payments and estimate the sale price of the stock several years in the future.
Infinite Period DDM (The Gordon Growth Model) Assume the future dividend stream will grow at a constant rate, g, for an infinite period, that r is greater than g, and that D1 is the dividend to be received at the end of period 1. Then:
From the formula we can see that the crucial relationship that determines the value of the stock is the spread between the required rate of return (r) and the expected growth rate of dividends (g). Anything that causes a decline in the spread will cause an increase in the computed value, whereas any increase in the spread will decrease the computed value. The process of estimating the inputs to be used in the DDM:
Multistage Dividend Discount Models The infinite period DDM has four assumptions:
Growth companies are firms that have the opportunities and abilities to earn rates of return on investments that are consistently above their required rates of return. They may experience this high growth for some finite periods of time, and the infinite period DDM cannot be used to value these true growth firms because these high-growth conditions are temporary and therefore inconsistent with the assumptions of the D... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Preferred Stock Valuation
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
A preferred stock pays a fixed dividend for an infinite period. Thus, a preferred stock is a perpetuity since it has no maturity. Payments of preferred dividends are made only after the firm pays its bond interest. Thus,
where r is the required rate of return on preferred stock, and the dividend is assumed to be perpetual. The basic types of preferred stock include:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Multiplier Models
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
A price multiple is a ratio of a stock's price to a measure of value per share, such as earnings, assets, sales, or cash flows. To tie a company's performance with its market valuation, an analyst needs to evaluate what a dollar of share price can "buy" in terms of the company's earnings, sales, cash flow, or assets. For example, an analyst can estimate that each dollar invested in the company generates $1.50 of sales. Using this information, the analyst can evaluate the attractiveness of investing in the company's stock at the current market price per share.
The P/E ratio compares stocks on the basis of how many dollars an investor is willing to pay for a dollar of expected earnings. It is also called the earnings multiplier. The two alternative types of P/E are trailing P/E and leading P/E.
You can use the DDM to develop the earnings multiplier model:
For example, a stock has an expected dividend payout ratio of 90%, a required rate of return of 15%, and expected growth rate of 10%. The P/E ratio is 0.9/(0.15 - 0.1) = 18. If an investor has projected next year's earnings to be $5, the current value of the stock is $5 x 18 = $90. Thus the P/E ratio is determined by:
Since a firm's long-run target payout ratio is rather stable, the spread between k and g is the main determinant of the size of the P/E ratio. A price-to-book ratio is a price multiple comparing a company's current market share price to its book value per share. A P/S multiple is a price multiple that divides the price per share by the last 12 months' net sales per share. A price-to-cash-flow ratio equals market price per share / cash flow per share. The Method of Comparables Price multiples are price-scaled by a measure of value, which provides the basis for the method of comparables. The method involves the comparison of a company's actual price multiple to some benchmark value to evaluate if an asset is relatively fairly priced, relatively undervalued, or relatively overvalued. The economic rationale is the law of one price - similar assets should sell at approximately equal prices. That is, if two companies are identical in all respects, their shares should be quoted at the same price in an efficient market. Some of the most widely used benchmarks involve the multiple of a closely matched individual stock and the average or median value of the multiple for the stock's company or industry peer group. This method is the most popular application of price multiples. It allows investors to determine a stock's relative valuation as compared to the benchmark. For example, many analysts point out that even after the technology market crash of 2000-2001, some technology stocks still re... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Enterprise Value
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
Since EBITDA are distributed between all types of investors in a company (common shareholders, preferred shareholders, and creditors), they reflect the fundamental value of the company as a whole. Therefore, a multiple using total company value is logically most appropriate. The EV/EBITDA ratio responds to this need.
Enterprise value (EV) is total company value minus the value of cash and investments.
EV/EBITDA is an indication of company value, not equity value. Example
The company's financial statements show that the only interest-paying liability assumed by the company is a 5-year $200MM note maturing in 3 years' time and currently trading at 4.13%. The note is paying semi-annual coupons and all interest payments have been met so far. The company also has preferred stock that is not trading on any exchange. The book value of the preferred stock is $45. No preferred dividends are currently in arrears. Solution: 1. Calculation of EBITDA EBITDA = Net Income + Interest Expense + Depreciation and Amortization + Tax Expense Tax Expense = (Net Income / (1 - Tax Rate)) - Net Income = [34.0 / (1 - 0.25)] - 34.0 = 11.3 EBITDA = 34.0 + 7.62 + 17.2 + 11.3 = 70.12 2. Calculation of Enterprise Value (EV) Total market value of common stock = price per share of common stock x number of shares outstanding = Price per share x (shares issued - treasury stock) = 13.8 x (20,000,000 - 1,320,000) = 257.7 MM Since the company's preferred stock is not publicly traded, we will use its book value for calculation of EV. Semi-annual coupon on the bond = Cash outflow for interest payments / 2 = 4 / 2 = 2 We know: the bond's term to maturity = 3 years Yield to maturity = 4.13% Semi-annual coupon payments = 2MM Face Value = 200MM Therefore, we can calculate the bond's total current market value = $188.1. EV = Total market value of common stock + Total market value of preferred stock + Total market value of debt - Cash balances - Investments = 257.7 + 45.0 + 188.1 - 8.9 - 6.2 = 475.7. 3. Calculation of EV/EBITDA ratio EV/EBITDA = 475.7 / 70.12 = 6.78 Advantages:
Disadvantages:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Asset-Based Valuation
#analysis-and-valuation #cfa #cfa-level-1 #reading-51-equity-valuation-concepts-and-basic-tools
The theory underlying the asset-based approach is that the value of a business is equal to the sum of the value of the business's assets. This is the principle of substitution: no rational investor will pay more for the business assets than the cost of procuring assets of similar economic utility. The approach estimates the intrinsic value of a common share from the estimated value of assets of a corporation minus the estimated value of its liabilities and preferred shares.
Pursuant to accounting conventions, most assets are reported on the books of the subject company at their acquisition value, net of depreciation where applicable. These values must be adjusted to fair market value wherever possible. The value of a company's intangible assets, such as goodwill, is generally impossible to determine apart from the company's overall enterprise value. For this reason, the asset-based approach is not the most probative method of determining the value of going business concerns. In these cases, the asset-based approach yields a result that is probably less than the fair market value of the business. The result from an asset-based valuation model may be used as a "sanity check" when compared to other models of valuation. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Basic Features of a Fixed-Income Security
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-52-fixed-income-securities-defining-elements
A fixed income security is a financial obligation of an entity (the issuer) that promises to pay a specified sum of money at specified future date.
Issuers of bonds include supranational organizations, sovereign governments, non-sovereign governments, quasi-government entities, and corporate issuers. The risk of the issuer failing to make full and timely payments of interest and/or repayment of principal is called credit risk. Credit risk is inherent in all debt investments. The maturity date is the date when the bond issuer is obligated to pay the outstanding principal amount. It defines the remaining life of the bond.
The par value (principal, face value, redemption value, or maturity value) is the amount that the issuer agrees to repay the bondholder on the maturity date.
The interest rate that the issuer agrees to pay each year is called the coupon rate (or nominal rate). The coupon is the annual amount of the interest payment: par value x coupon rate. In the U.S. most issuers pay the coupon semi-annually. If you have a "6.5 of 12/1/2019 trading at 97," you have a bond that has a 6.5 coupon rate, matures on 12/1/2019 and is selling for 97% of its par value. A floating-rate security's coupon payments are reset periodically according to some reference rate. The typical coupon formula is: coupon rate = reference rate + quoted margin.
A zero-coupon bond promises to pay a stipulated principal amount at a future maturity date, but it does not promise to make any interim interest payments. The value of a zero-coupon bond increases overtime, and approaches par value at maturity. The return on the bond is the difference between what the investor pays for the bond at the time of purchase and the principal payment at maturity. The implied interest rate is earned at maturity. For example, if an investor purchases a zero-coupon bond for $60 with a par value of $100, the investor will earn $40 of interest over the life of the bond. The investor receives no payments until maturity of the bond when he or she will receive $100. Bonds can be issued in any currency. If an issue has coupon payments in one currency and principal payments in another currency, it is called dual-currency issue. The holders of currency option bonds can choose the currency in which coupons and principals are paid. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Bond Indenture
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-52-fixed-income-securities-defining-elements
An indenture is the contract between the issuer and the bondholder specifying the issuer's legal requirements. It contains the promises of the issuer and the rights of the holder of the bond.
Bondholders may have great difficulty in ascertaining whether the issuer has been fulfilling its obligations specified in the indenture. The indenture is thus made out to a third-party trustee as a representative of the interests of the bondholders; a trustee acts in a fiduciary capacity for bondholders.
Legal Identity of the Bond Issuer and its Legal Form The issuer is identified in the indenture by its legal name. It is obligated to make timely payments of interest and repayment of principal. Bonds can be issued by a subsidiary of a parent legal entity. They can also be issued by a holding company. A special-purpose vehicle/entity (a separate legal entity) can issue bonds collateralized by assets transferred from its sponsor. If bankruptcy occurs, the sponsor's creditors cannot go after such assets; this is known as bankruptcy remote. Source of Repayment Proceeds The source of repayment proceeds varies, depending on the type of bond.
Asset or Collateral Backing Collateral backing can increase a bond issuer's credit quality.
An unsecured bond is not secured by collateral. Covered bonds are debts issued by banks that are fully collateralized by residential or commercial mortgage loans or by loans to public sector institutions. Credit Enhancement Credit enhancement reduces credit risks. Internal credit enhancement considerations include:
External credit enhancements are financial guarantees from third parties. Examples include surety bonds, bank guarantees, and letters of credit. If the third-party defaults, the external credit enhancement will fail. A cash collateral account can mitigate this concern. Bond Covenants Affirmative covenants set forth certain actions that borrowers must take, such as:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Legal, Regulatory and Tax Considerations
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-52-fixed-income-securities-defining-elements
An important consideration for investors is where the bonds are issued and traded; this affects applicable laws, regulations, and tax status.
The bond market can be classified into two markets: an internal market and an external market. Internal Bond Market The internal bond market is also called the national bond market. It is divided into two parts: the domestic bond market and the foreign bond market. The domestic bond market is where domestic issuers issue bonds and where these bonds are subsequently traded. A foreign bond (called a Yankee bond in the U.S., a Samurai bond in Japan, and a Bulldog bondin the U.K.) is a bond issued in a country's national bond market by an issuer not domiciled in the country where those bonds are subsequently traded.
External Bond Market This market is also referred to as the international bond market, the offshore bond market, or the Eurobond market. The bonds in this market are:
Eurobonds are subject to a lower level of listing, disclosure, and regulatory requirements than domestic or foreign bonds. Eurobonds are classified according to the currency in which the issue is denominated. For example, if a Eurobond is denominated in U.S. dollars, it is called a Eurodollar bond. A USD bond issued by Ford and sold in Japan is thus called a Eurodollar bond, not a Euroyen bond. A global bond is a debt obligation that is issued and traded in both the Eurobond market and at least one domestic market (for example, a USD bond issued by the Canadian government sold in the U.S. and Japan). Issuers of global bonds typically have high credit quality, and regularly have large fund needs. The first global bond was issued by the World Bank. Tax Considerations In general the income portion of a bond is taxed at the ordinary tax rate. Some countries implement a capital gains tax. Some countries even differentiate between long-term and short-term capital gains. There may be specific tax provisions for bonds issued at a discount or bought at a premium. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Structure of a Bond's Cash Flows
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-52-fixed-income-securities-defining-elements
Principal Repayment Structures
Bullet bond. The issuer pays the full principal amount at the maturity date. Amortizing bond. Its payment schedule requires periodic payment of interest and repayment of principal. If the entire principal is not amortized over the life of the bond, a balloon payment is required at the end of the term. A sinking fund arrangement allows a bond's principal outstanding amount to be repaid each year throughout the bond's life or after a specific date. A call provision is the right of the issuer to retire the issue prior to the stated maturity date. When only part of an issue is called, the bond certificates to be called are selected randomly or on a pro rata basis. Coupon Payment Structures The coupon payments of a floating rate security are reset periodically (e.g., quarterly) according to a reference rate such as LIBOR. Example Suppose that the reference rate is the 1-month LIBOR and the quoted margin is 100 basis points: if the 1-month LIBOR on the coupon reset rate is 5%, the coupon rate is 5% + 100 basis points = 6%. The quoted margin does not need to be a positive value. For example, it could be -90 basis points. A floating-rate security may have upper and/or lower limits on the coupon rate. A cap is the maximum coupon rate of a floater. It is an attractive feature for the issuer since it limits the coupon rate. A floor is the minimum coupon rate, and it is an attractive feature for the investor. A collar is a floater with both a cap and floor.
For example, assume the reference rate is the 1-month LIBOR, the quoted margin is 100 basis points, and there is a cap of 7%. If the 1-month LIBOR at reset date was 6.5%, the coupon rate per the formula would be 7.5% (6.5% + 1%), but with the cap the coupon rate is restricted to 7%. A typical floater's coupon rate increases when the reference rate increases and decreases when the reference rate decreases. However, an inverse floater's (also called a reverse floater) coupon rate moves in the opposite direction from the change in the reference rate: coupon rate = K - L x reference rate, where K and L are constant values set forth in the prospectus for the issue. To prevent a negative coupon rate there is a floor imposed. For example, an inverse floater's coupon rate = 12% - 2 x 3-month LIBOR. If the three-month LIBOR is 2%, then the coupon rate for the next interest payment period is: 12% - 2 x 2% = 8%. Step-up coupon bonds have low initial and gradually increasing coupon rates; that is, their coupon rates "step up" over time.
Stepped spread floaters. The quoted margins for these coupons can step to either a higher or a lower level over the security's life. For example, a five-year floating-rate note's coupon rate may be six-month LIBOR + 1% for the first two years, and three-month LIBOR + 3% for the remaining years. Credit-linked coupon bonds. These coupons change when the issuer's credit rating changes. Payment-in-kind coupon bonds. These coupons allow the issuer to pay coupons with additional amounts of the bond issue rather than in cash. The payment structures for index-linked bonds vary considerably among countries. An inflation-linked bond or linker links its coupon payments and/or principal repayments to a price index. For example, the Treasury Inflation Protection Securities' (TIPS) coupon is... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Bonds with Contingency Provisions
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-52-fixed-income-securities-defining-elements
An embedded option is a provision in a bond indenture that gives the issuer and/or the bondholder an option to take some action against the other party. These options are embedded because they are an integral part of the bond structure. In contrast, "bare options" trade separately from any underlying security.
Embedded options may benefit either the issuer or the bondholder. An embedded option benefits the issuer if it gives the issuer a right or it puts an upper limit on the issuer's obligations. An embedded option benefits the bondholder if it gives the bondholder a right or it puts a lower limit on the bondholder's benefits. Callable Bonds A bond issue that permits the issuer to call or refund an issue prior to the stated maturity date is referred to as a callable bond.
A call option becomes more valuable to the bond issuer when interest rates fall. If interest rates fall, the issuer can retire the bond paying a high coupon rate, and replace it with lower coupon bonds. However, call provisions are detrimental to bondholders, since proceeds can only be reinvested at a lower interest rate. Callable bonds exercise styles:
Putable Bonds A put option grants the bondholder the right to sell the issue back to the issuer at a specified price ("put price") on designated dates. The repurchase price is set at the time of issue, and is usually par value. Bondholders have the option of putting bonds back to the issuer either once during the lifetime of the bond (a "one-time put bond"), or on a number of different dates. The special advantages of put bonds mean that putable bonds have lower yield than otherwise similar bonds. The price behaviour of a putable bond is the opposite of that of a callable bond. The put option becomes more valuable when interest rates rise. Convertible Bonds A convertible bond is an issue that grants the bondholder the right to convert the bond for a specified number of shares of common stock. This feature allows the bondholder to take advantage of favorable movements in the price of the issuer's common stock without having to participate in losses. Example Suppose you can buy a 10%, 15-year, $100 par value bond today for $110 that can be converted into 10 shares at $10 per share. The market price of stock = $8; no dividends.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Classification of Fixed-Income Markets
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-53-fixed-income-markets-issuance-trading-and-funding
Below are common criteria used to classify fixed-income markets.
Type of Issuer Three major market sectors are the government and government-related sector, the corporate sector, and the structured finance sector. In most countries, the largest issuers of bonds are national and local governments as well as financial institutions. Credit Quality A bond can be considered investment-grade or high-yield based on the issuer's creditworthiness (as judged by credit ratings agencies). Maturity Money market bonds have original maturities ranging from overnight to one year. Capital market bonds have original maturities longer than one year. Currency Denomination The majority of bonds are denominated in either Euros or U.S. dollars. Type of Coupon Some bonds pay a fixed rate of interest while others pay a floating rate of interest. The coupon rate of a floater is expressed as a reference rate, such as LIBOR, plus a spread. Different reference rates are used, depending on where a bond is issued and its currency denomination. Interbank offered rates are sets of rates that reflect the rates at which banks believe they could borrow unsecured funds from other banks in the interbank market for different currencies and maturities. These rates may be used as reference rates for floating-rate bonds, mortgages, and derivatives. Geography There are domestic, foreign and Eurobond markets. Investors also make a distinction between the developed and emerging bond markets. Emerging market bonds usually exhibit higher risk than developed markets bonds. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Primary and Secondary Bond Markets
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-53-fixed-income-markets-issuance-trading-and-funding
In primary bond markets issuers first sell bonds to investors to raise capital. In secondary bond markets investors trade existing bonds.
Primary Bond Markets Examples
There are two mechanisms for issuing a bond in primary markets. Public Offering Any member of the public may buy the bonds in a public offering.
Private Placement A private placement bond is a non-underwritten, unregistered corporate bond sold directly to a single investor or a small group of investors. Because the bonds are not registered, SEC regulations require firms to offer such bonds privately only to investors deemed sophisticated: insurance companies, pension funds, banks, and endowments. Secondary Bond Markets The secondary market arises after issue, when bonds are sold from one bondholder to another. Its purpose is to provide liquidity - ease or speed in trading a bond at price close to its fair market value. The buying and selling of existing bond issues is done primarily through a network of brokers and dealers who operate through organized exchanges and over-the-counter (OTC) markets. Most bonds are traded in OTC markets. Corporate bonds typically settle on a T + 3 basis. Government and quasi-government bonds typically settle at T + 1. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Sovereign Bonds, Non-Sovereign Bonds, Quasi-Government Bonds, and Supranational Bonds
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-53-fixed-income-markets-issuance-trading-and-funding
Sovereign Bonds
Sovereign bonds are issued by a country's central government for fiscal reasons. They take different names and forms, depending on where they are issued, their maturities, and their coupon types. For example, U.S. government bonds with an original maturity shorter than one year are known as T-bills. The most recently issued U.S. Treasury bond of a particular maturity is known as a on-the-run issue. Sovereign bonds are usually unsecured and are backed by the taxing authority of a national government. Credit rating agencies perform sovereign risk analysis in both local currency and foreign currency. The risk level of local and foreign currency is different. Generally, if an issuer is planning to default, it is more likely to do so with a foreign currency issue, as it has less control over foreign currency with respect to its exchange rate. Sovereign bonds can be domestic bonds, foreign bonds, and Eurobonds. They can be fixed-rate, floating-rate or inflation-linked bonds. For example, Treasury Inflation Protection Securities (TIPS) are T-notes or T-bonds that are adjusted for inflation. Non-Sovereign Bonds Non-sovereign bonds are bonds issued by local governments. The sources of repayment proceeds are (the):
This type of bonds receives high credit ratings due to low default rates. They often trade at a lower yield than their sovereign counterparts. Quasi-Government Bonds Quasi-government bonds are issued by the government through various political subdivisions. Most of them are not secured by collateral and don't have government guarantees. Their credit ratings are very high due to extremely low historical default rates. Supranational Bonds Supranational bonds are bonds issued by supranational agencies such as the World Bank. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Corporate Debt
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-53-fixed-income-markets-issuance-trading-and-funding
Corporations issue different types of debt.
Bank Loans and Syndicated Loans A bilateral loan is a loan from a single lender to a single borrower. A syndicated loan is a loan from a group of lenders to a single borrower. Most loans are floating-rate loans. Commercial Paper Commercial paper describes a short-term, unsecured promissory note that is used by companies as a source of short-term and bridge financing.
Corporate Notes and Bonds Corporate bonds and notes take different forms, depending on the maturities, coupon payment and principal repayment structures, collateral backing and contingency provisions. These concepts are covered in the previous reading. Medium-term notes (MTN) are corporate debt obligations offered to investors continually over a period of time by an agent of the issuer. The maturities vary from nine months to 30 years. Note that the term "medium-term" is not related to the term to maturity of the securities. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Short-Term Funding Alternatives Available to Banks
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-53-fixed-income-markets-issuance-trading-and-funding
Banks have different short-term funding sources. These include:
Repurchase Agreements A repurchase agreement is the sale of a security with a commitment by the seller to buy the same security back from the purchaser at a specified price at a designated future date. It is actually a collateralized loan. The difference between the purchase (repurchase) price and the sale price is the dollar interest cost of the loan. The implied interest rate is called the repo rate. A loan for one day is called an overnight repo. A loan for more than one day is called a term repo. If a repo agreement lasts until the final maturity date, it is known as a "repo to maturity." The repo rate is lower than the cost of bank financing. It is a function of a few factors, including the risk associated with the collateral, the term of the repo, the delivery requirement for the collateral, the supply and demand conditions of the collateral, and the interest rates of alternative financing in the money market. The more difficult it is to obtain the collateral, the lower the repo rate. Hot collateral or special collateral is collateral that is highly sought-after by dealers and can be financed at a lower repo rate than general collateral. From a dealer's perspective, if it is lending cash, the repo is then referred to as a reverse repurchase agreement. Credit risks are faced by both parties. The difference between the market value of the security used as collateral and the value of the loan is the repo margin. It is most likely to be lower when:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Bond Prices and the Time Value of Money
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
The idea that the value of any financial asset equals the present value of its expected cash flows is the fundamental principle of valuation. This principal is applicable to bonds, stocks and other financial assets. The present value of cash flows is calculated by discounting the cash flows at appropriate interest rates.
The cash flows of a bond have two components: periodic coupon payments and principal repayment at maturity, or when the bond is retired. Both the amount and the timing of the cash flows should be identified to value the bond. For example a five-year Treasury coupon note with a par-value of $1,000 has a 10% coupon. Its cash flows are as follows:
For a given discount rate, the present value of a single cash flow to be received in the future is the amount of money that must be invested today to generate that future value. The present value of a cash flow will depend on when a cash flow will be received (i.e., the timing of a cash flow) and the discount rate (i.e., interest rate) used to calculate the present value.
i = the discount rate t = the number of years to receive the cash flow The sum of the present value for a security's expected cash flows is the value of the security:
N = the number of annual periods till maturity The convention of the bond market is to quote annual interest rates that are double semi-annual rates. For most bonds coupon payments are semi-annual. Coupon payments are adjusted by dividing the annual coupon payment by two and adjusting the discount rate by dividing the annual discount rate by two:
The differences are:
A bond is priced at a premium above par value when the coupon rate is greater than the market discount rate. It is priced at a discount below par value when the coupon rate is less than the market discount rate. The amount of any premium or discount is the present value of the "excess" or "deficiency" in the coupon payments relative to the yield-to-maturity. Yield-to-Maturity is the interest rate that will make the present value of the cash flows from a bond equal to its price. It is the promised rate of return on a bond if an investor buys and holds the bond to its maturity date. Consider a 10%, two-year bond selling for $1,036.30 (selling at premium). The cash flows for this bond are (1) four payments of $50 every six months, and (2) a payment of $1,000 two years from now. $1036.30 = $50/(1 + YTM/2)1 + $50/(1 + YTM/2)2 + $50/(1 + YTM/2)3 + $1050/(1 + YTM/2)4. Through trial and error or by using a financial calculator, YTM is found to be 8%. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Relationships between Bond Price and Bond Characteristics
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
Price / Discount Rate Relationship
The value of a bond is equal to the present value of its coupon payments plus the present value of the maturity value.
The higher the discount rate, the lower a cash flow's present value and therefore since the value of a security is the present value of the cash flows, the higher the discount rate, the lower a security's value. Example A 1-year, semi-annual-pay bond has a $1,000 face value and a 10% coupon.
The degree of price change is not always the same for a particular bond. The price/yield relationship for an option-free bond is convex. In other words, this is not a straight-line relationship.
For a given change in yield, the price increases by more than it decreases. P1 - P > P - P2. Option-free bonds exhibit positive convexity, which means that for a large change in interest rates, the amount of price appreciation is greater than the amount of price depreciation. This also means that the price change is greater when the level of required yield is low (and vice versa). Coupon and Maturity Effects All else being equal,
Constant-Yield Price Trajectory As a bond moves closer to its maturity date, its value changes. More specifically, assuming that the discount rate does not change, a bond's value:
At the maturity date, the bond's value is equal to its par value ("pull to par value").
Pricing Bonds with Spot Rates The valuation approach illustrated so far is the traditional approach, which uses a single interest rate to discount all of a bond's cash flows. It views all cash flows of a bond as the same, regardless of their timing. In reality, however, each individual cash flow of the bond is unique. Therefore, using a single discount rate in the bond valuation model may result in a mis-priced bond, thereby creating arbitrage opportunities. The arbitrage-free approach values a bond as a package of cash flows, with each cash flow viewed as a zero-coupon bond and discounted at its own unique discount rate. These spot rates are used to discount cash flows to get the arbitrage-free value of a bond. The arbitrage-free approach has three steps.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Flat Price, Accrued Interest, and the Full Price
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
Coupon interest is paid not daily, but monthly, semi-annually or annually. If an investor sells a bond between coupon payments and the buyer holds it until the next coupon payment, the entire coupon interest earned for the period will be paid to the buyer. The seller gives up the interest from the time of the last coupon payment to the time until the bond is sold. The amount of interest over this period that will be received by the buyer (even though it was earned by the seller) is called accrued interest.
Accrued interest is calculated as a proportional share of the next coupon payment using either the actual/actual or 30/360 method to count days.
The amount that the buyer pays the seller the agreed upon price for the bond plus accrued interest is called the full price (dirty price). The agreed-upon bond price without accrued interest is simply referred to as the flat price (clean price). Flat prices are quoted in order to not to misrepresent the daily increase in the full price as a result of interest accruals.
Here is how to calculate the full price:
Note that the next coupon payment is discounted for the remainder of the coupon period. An easier formula is used to to get the present value of the bond at the last coupon payment date and find its (future) value on the settlement date.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Matrix Pricing
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
Most bonds don't trade on a daily basis. Usually only the most recent large issues have the greatest liquidity and pricing ability. There is rarely a consensus on the exact value of an individual bond.
Matrix pricing is the practice of interpolating among values for similar instruments arranged in a matrix format.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Yield Measures for Fixed-Rate Bonds
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
Yield measures are used to evaluate the rate of return on bonds.
The periodicity of an annual interest rate is the number of periods in the year. Consider a two-year, zero-coupon bond priced now at 88 per 100 of par value.
Note:
To convert an annual yield from one periodicity to another:
Example
Solution 1
Solution 2
Street convention yields assume that payments are made on scheduled dates, excluding weekends and holidays. The true yield is calculated using a calendar including weekends and holidays. The government equivalent yield is based on actual/actual day count. The current yield relates the annual dollar coupon interest to the market price. For example, the current yield for a 5%, two-year bond with a price of $978 is 5.11% (($1000 x 5%) / $978)). This is the simplest of all yield measures, and fails to recognize any capital gain or loss, reinvestment income or accrued interest. The simple yield is similar to the current yield but includes the straight-line amortization of the discount or premium. The standard YTM measure assumes that the bond will be held to maturity. It is not an appropriate yield measure for callable bonds, because they may be retired before maturity. For callable bonds a yield to first call, which assumes that the bond will be called on the first call date, is computed. Callable bonds typically have multiple call dates, each with its own call price. The yield to worst is the lowest potential yield that can be received on a bond without the issuer actually defaulting. It illustrates the worst possible yield an investor may realize. The option-adjusted-yield is the yield-to-maturity after adding the theoretical value of the call option to the price. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Yield Measures for Floating-Rate Notes and Money Market Instruments
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
Floating-Rate Notes
Interest rate volatility affects the price of a fixed-rate bonds. A floating-rate note (a floater, or an FRN) maintains a more stable price than a fixed-rate note because interest payments adjust for changes in market interest rates. With a floater, interest rate volatility affects future interest payments. The quoted margin is typically the specified yield spread over or under the reference rate, which is often LIBOR. It is used for compensating the investor for the difference in the credit risk of the issuer and that implied by the reference rate. The discount margin, also known as the required margin, is the spread required by investors and to which the quoted margin must be set in order for the FRN to trade at par value on a rate reset date. Changes in the discount margin usually come from changes in the issuer's credit risk. Money Market Instruments Unique characteristics:
Money market instruments need to be converted to a common basis for analysis. Discount rate:
Note that the denominator is FV, not PV. The rate of return is therefore understated. Add-on rate:
Note the only difference: the denominator is PV, not FV. Bond equivalent yield: money market rate stated on a 365-day add-on rate basis. Example 90-day T-bill, face value 100, quoted discount rate: 2.5% for an assumed 360-day year. PV = 100 x (1 - 90/360 x 0.025) = 99.375 To calculate the bond equivalent yield for a 365-day year: AOR = (365/90) x (100 - 99.375)/99.375 = 2.55% |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. The Maturity Structure of Interest Rates
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
A yield curve is typically constructed on the basis of observed yields and maturities. There are different types of yield curves.
The most common type is the upward-sloping yield curve. The longer maturity issues have higher yields than the shorter maturity issues. A spot rate is the yield on a zero-coupon bond. A series of spot rates (spot curve) can be used to discount the cash flows of a bond. Default-free spot rates can be derived from the Treasury par yield curve by a method called bootstrapping. The basic principle of bootstrapping is that the value of a Treasury coupon security should be equal to the value of the package of zero-coupon Treasury securities that duplicate the coupon bond's cash flows. Example Determine the spot rate for the fourth period cash flow. The coupon rate is 4.11%, paid semi-annually.
The coupon for each period should be discounted at the corresponding spot rate. 100 = 2.055/(1+0.03/2)1 + 2.055/(1+0.033/2)2 + 2.055/(1+0.035053/2)3 + 102.055/(1+i/2)4 = 2.0246 + 1.9888 + 1.9506 + 102.055/(1+i/2)4 i = 2.0669% and the annualized spot rate is 4.1339%. A par curve is a sequence of yields-to-maturity in which each bond is priced at par value. A par curve is obtained from a spot curve. All bonds used to derive the par curve are assumed to have the same credit risk, periodicity, currency, liquidity, tax status, and annual yields. A forward rate refers to the interest rate on a loan beginning some time in the future. In contrast, a spot rate is the interest rate on a loan beginning immediately. For example, the two-year forward rate one year from now is 4%. This means that if you borrow a two-year loan one year from now, you will pay an interest of 4%. A forward curve is a series of forward rates, each with the same time frame. Forward rate calculations are usually based on a theoretical spot rate curve. They are sometimes referred to as implicit forward rates. Given spot rates for maturities of j and k years, you can compute the forward rate (fj, k-j) that applies for the period from year j to year k using the relationship:
Example Compute the annualized six-month forward rate two years from now.
In order to compute the six-month forward rate two years from now, first determine the spot rate for the fifth period (0.087) and the spot rate for the fourth period (0.0700). Then complete the following calculation: [(1 + 0.0875/2)5/(1 + 0.0700/2)4] - 1 = 7.95%. Similarly, implied spot rates can be calculated as geometric average of forward rates. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Yield Spreads
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-54-introduction-to-fixed-income-valuation
A bond's yield-to-maturity can be separated into a benchmark and a spread.
Different spread measures:
Example Phil Deter was interested in purchasing a non-Treasury bond for 110.2950. Given the Treasury spot rate data below, and assuming that the non-Treasury bond had a coupon of 9.60%, what is the likely Z-spread that Phil will earn over the duration of his investment?
It is important to add all of the cash flows for each bond (discounted at the appropriate spot rate) and compare these to the purchase price by trial-and-error. The bond with a spread of 143 Basis Points has a purchase price of 4.70 + 4.58 + 4.46 + 4.32 + 4.15 + 4.00 + 84.08 = 110.2950. Since this purchase price corresponds with the bond corresponding with Phil's interest, the appropriate spread must be 143 Basis Points. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Benefits of Securitization for Economies and Financial Markets
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
Securitization repackages relatively simple debt obligations, such as bank loans and consumer loans, into more complex structures. It then uses the cash flows from the pool of debt obligations to pay off the bond created in the process.
Securitization has several benefits:
The end result is lower cost and risk, more liquidity, and improved economic efficiency. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. The Securitization Process
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
The process:
The parties to a securitization transaction:
The SPV is a bankruptcy-remote vehicle that plays a pivotal role in the securitization process. It issues securities backed by the underlying assets. The underlying assets are used as collateral for the securities. Cash flows generated from the underlying assets are used to service the debt obligations on the securities. The SPV separates the assets used as collateral from the corporation seeking financing.
Prepayment tranching refers to dividing cash flows from securitized assets among different classes of securities so that some receive repayment of principal before others. It is used to reallocate the prepayment risk of the underlying loans among different classes of securities. In the simplest cases, a deal might offer several classes of serially maturing securities. Some investors might prefer the securities with shorter maturities while others might favor the ones with longer maturities. Collateralized mortgage obligations (CMOs) are the most ubiquitous examples of time tranching. Credit tranching refers to the creation of a multi-layered capital structure that includes senior and subordinated tranches (classes). The structure is designed so that any losses caused by defaults will be passed on to the subordinated tranches first. Credit tranching is thus used to reallocate the credit risk associated with the collateral. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Residential Mortgage Loans
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
A mortgage is a loan secured by the collateral of a specified real estate property. It obligates the borrower to make a predetermined series of payments. If the borrower fails to make the contracted payments, the lender can seize the property in order to ensure that the debt is paid off.
The interest rate on a mortgage loan is called the mortgage rate or contract rate. The ratio of the property's purchase price to the amount of the mortgage is called the loan-to-value ratio. The basic idea behind the design of the fixed-rate, level-payment, fully amortized mortgage loan is that the borrower pays interest and repays principal in equal installments over an agreed-upon period of time, called the maturity or term of the mortgage. Thus at the end of the term the loan has been fully amortized. Each monthly payment for this mortgage design is due on the first of each month and consists of:
The difference between the monthly mortgage payment and the portion of the payment that represents interest equals the amount that is applied to reduce the outstanding mortgage balance. Early payments are mostly interest with a small amount of principal repayment, while later payments are mostly principal repayment with a small amount of interest. The following table illustrates the annual breakdown of a 30-year (360 month) mortgage on a $100k loan that yields 9.5% interest.
As the example shows, the portion of the monthly mortgage payment applied to interest declineseach month, and the portion applied to principal repayment increases. The various mortgage designs throughout the world specify:
Prepayments and Cash Flow Uncertainty Mortgage borrowers may have an embedded option that allows them to prepay all or part of their loan at anytime during the life of the mortgage. Prepayments occur for one of several reasons:
The prepayment could be the entire outstanding balance or a partial paydown of the mortgage balance. When a prepayment does not cover the entire outstanding balance it is called a curtailment. Thus, lenders do not know with certainty what their cash flows (both the amount and timing) will be for any given period. This risk is referred to as prepayment risk. Usually, mortgages are prepaid when interest rates fall. Hence, lenders receive repayment at a time when they cannot reinvest the cash at the same high rate at which they had originally invested. Mortgages with prepayment penalti... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Mortgage Pass-Through Securities
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
A mortgage pass-through security is created when one or more mortgage holders form a collection (pool) of mortgages and sell shares or participation certificates in the pool.
Below is an illustration of how the pass-through process channels mortgage payments from homeowners to coupon payments to mortgage bond investors.
In the U.S., there are two sectors for securities backed by residential mortgages:
Measures of Prepayment Rate The cash flow of a mortgage pass-through security depends on the cash flow of the underlying pool of mortgages and consist of monthly mortgage payments representing interest, the scheduled repayment of principal, and any prepayments, net of servicing and other fees. Estimating the cash flow from a pass-through requires forecasting prepayments. One way of forecasting is to assume that some fraction of the remaining principal in the pool is prepaid each month for the remaining term of the mortgages. The prepayment rate assumed for a pool, called the conditional prepayment rate (CPR), is based on a pool's characteristics (including its historical prepayment experience) and the current and expected economic environment. The CPR is an annual prepayment rate. For example, if the CPR is 8%, we would expect that 8% of the remaining principal will be prepaid each year. The single-monthly mortality rate (SMM) is the percentage of a pool's remaining principal that is expected to be prepaid each month. SMM is the CPR converted from an annual term to a monthly rate.
Example: if the CPR is 10%, the SMM = 1 - (1 - 0.1)1/12 = 0.87% Now suppose that the principal balance in a pool is $10 million and $200k is scheduled to be repaid in a given month. The SMM is 0.87%. The forecasted prepayment amount for the month is 0.0087 x (10,000,000 - 200,000) = $85,260. Note that scheduled principal repayments are neither included in the starting principal nor in the prepayment forecast. Prepayment does not include scheduled repayment.
The Public Securities Association Prepayment Benchmark is a schedule of prepayment speeds deemed to be "usual." Actual prepayment speeds are quoted relative to the PSA benchmark. If prepayments are following the PSA schedule, the speed is said to be 100% PSA. If prepayments are twice as fast as the PSA benchmark, the speed is said to be 200% PSA. Example: if a seven-year old mortgage pool is experiencing a CPR of 9%, Its relative to PSA speed is quoted as 150 PSA. The CPR for a seven-year old pool should be 6% according to PSA; 9% is 50% greater than the 6% PSA. Thus, the current speed is 150 PSA. The PSA benchmark is generally not a good forecast. It is simply a way of communicating how quickly principal on an underlying pool of mortgage... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Collateralized Mortgage Obligations
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
Collateralized mortgage obligations are securities issued against a pool of mortgage pass-through securities for which the cash flows have been allocated to different classes (tranches), each having a different claim against the cash flows of the pool.
As previously mentioned, some institutional investors are concerned with extension risk and other with contraction risk. The mere creation of a CMO cannot eliminate prepayment risk; it can only distribute the various forms of this risk among different classes of bondholders. The technique of redistributing the coupon interest and principal from the underlying collateral to different classes (so that a CMO results in instruments that have varying convexity characteristics more suitable to the needs and expectations of different investors) broadens the appeal of mortgage-backed products to various traditional fixed-income investors. A tranche is a slice of the cash flows generated by a mortgage pool. The claim of each tranche is governed by a specific formula. A CMO distributes prepayment risk among tranches so as to create products that provide better matching of assets and liabilities for institutional investors. There are many types of CMO structures; three are discussed here. Sequential-Pay Tranches The first generation of CMOs was structured so that each tranche would be retired sequentially; such structures are referred to as sequential-pay tranches. In a "plain vanilla" CMO structure, there may be four tranches: A, B, C and Z. The first three tranches, with tranche A representing the shortest-maturity bond, receive periodic interest payments from the underlying collateral. Tranche Z is an accrual bond that receives no periodic interest until the other three tranches are retired.
There is some protection provided against prepayment risk for each tranche. For example, prioritizing the distribution of principal effectively protects tranche A against extension risk (the protection coming from tranches B, C and D). Similarly, tranches C and D are protected against contraction risk. Note that tranche Z (the accrual tranche) appeals to investors who are concerned with reinvest risk. Since there are no coupon payments to reinvest, reinvestment risk is eliminated until all the other tranches are paid off. Planned Amortization Class Tranches A Planned Amortization Class (PAC) bond is a CMO product that was created to have a similar cash flow structure to a sinking fund corporate bond within a specified range of prepayment rates (i.e., the cash flow pattern to the bond holder is known). The cash flow for PAC bonds is more predictable because there is a principal repayment schedule that must be satisfied. PAC bondholders, therefore, have priority over all other classes in the CMO issue in receiving principal payments from the underlying collateral in order to satisfy the repayment schedule. The greater certainty regarding the cash flow for PAC bonds comes at the expense, of course, of the non-PAC classes, called the companion or support classes.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securities
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
Commercial mortgage-backed securities are securitizations of mortgage loans backed by commercial real estate.
Credit Risk The loans that serve as CMBS collateral are commonly secured by commercial real estate such as apartment buildings, shopping malls, warehouse facilities, etc. Unlike most residential mortgage loans, these loans often do not provide recourse to the borrower or any form of guarantee. Lenders and investors look to the collateral, not the borrower, for ultimate repayment. Thus, analysis of the cash flows generated by the underlying properties as well as their value is critical. Credit analysis should be performed on a loan-by-loan basis because of the unique economic characteristics of each income-producing property in a pool. There are two relevant measures:
Basic CMBS Structure The major structural component of a CMBS deal is credit tranching. To have AAA rated tranches, there must be enough credit support from tranches that absorb any losses on the underlying collateral first. The tranches with less underlying credit support have lower credit ratings and investors are rewarded with commensurately higher yields. When delinquencies and defaults occur, cash flows otherwise due to the subordinated class are diverted to the senior classes to the extent required to meet scheduled principal and interest payments. Thus, subordination allows issuers to create highly-rated securities from collateral of various levels of quality. Call Protection Call protection comes in two forms: at the structure level and at the loan level. The creation of sequential-pay tranches is an example of call protection at the structure level. Call protection at the loan level comes in several forms, including prepayment lockout (usually two - five years), and stiff prepayment penalties that serve as a deterrent to the borrowers. Treasury make-whole (yield maintenance) is a common form of prepayment penalty that requires the borrower to accompany any prepayment with a premium which, when reinvested by the loan owner in Treasuries for the remaining term of the loan (had it not been prepaid), would exactly recreate the lost yield on the prepaid loan. Fixed-percentage prepayment penalties are also common, and require the prepaying borrower to pay a premium equal to a set of percentages of the balance being prepaid. An innovation in CMBS call protection is Treasury defeasance. This concept is similar to Treasury yield maintenance in that, instead of prepaying the loan, the borrower substitutes Treasury securities to replicate the cash flows of the mortgage. Balloon Maturity Provisions CMBS investors face two credit issues with respect to the CMBS mortgage pool: operational defaults (the risk that the property will not generate sufficient cash flow to make the monthly payments on the mortgage loan), and refinance risk (the risk that, at maturity, the property will lack sufficient value to be sold or refinanced in an amount sufficient to make the balloon payment.) Commercial mortgage loans usually balloon after 10 or 15 years and must be paid in full. Note that balloon loans have short maturities but longer amortizing terms, resulting in a lump sum payment due at maturity, which makes default highly likely if the borrower cannot refinance. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Non-Mortgage Asset-Backed Securities
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
Asset-backed securities are backed by a wide range of asset types.
Auto Loan Receivable-Backed Securities
Credit Card Receivable-Backed Securities
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Collateralized Debt Obligations
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-55-introduction-to-asset-backed-securities
Collateralized debt obligations (CDOs) are a type of structured asset-backed security (ABS) with value and payments derived from a portfolio of fixed-income underlying assets.
CDO Structure Collateralized loan obligations (CLOs) are CDOs backed primarily by leveraged bank loans. Collateralized bond obligations (CBOs) are CDOs backed primarily by leveraged fixed-income securities. CDOs are assigned different risk classes, or tranches.
Problem: The majority of investors are paid a floating rate, whereas the underlying pool bonds pay a fixed rate. If rates rise, the collateral manager can get burned. This is because the manager could find itself having to pay out an increasingly higher rate to tranche holders while its source of funds - interest on the underlying bonds - is fixed. Solution: The manager must protect against rising rates. Entering a swap as the fixed payer (variable receiver) solves the problem, as this position provides positive cash flow when interest rates rise. Example Consider the following CDO transaction:
Analysis The equity tranche is $100 - $100 x 0.75 - 10 = $15 million. Each year:
Netting the interest payments paid and received: $100 x (T-rate + 5%) - $75 x (T-rate + 1.5%) + $75 x LIBOR - $75 x (LIBOR + 0.5%) - $10 x (T-rate + 4%) = ($15 x T-rate + $3.1) million If the five-year T-rate at the time the CDO is issued is 5%, the amount available each year for the equity tranche is $15 x 0.05 + 3.1 = $3.85 million. Cash CDOs Cash CDOs involve a portfolio of cash assets, such as loans, corporate bonds, asset-backed securities or mortgage-backed securities. Ownership of the assets is transferred to the legal entity (a SPV) issuing the CDOs' tranches. The risk of loss on the assets is divided among tranches in reverse order of seniority. Motivation - Arbitrage vs. Balance Sheet
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. Sources of Return
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
There are three sources of return on a fixed-rate bond:
Example Harshal Shahe purchases a bond, but isn't sure how much of his total return will come from reinvested interest compared to coupon interest and capital gain. What is the total reinvested interest (i.e., interest on interest) that Herschel earns, assuming a price of $941.12, coupon of 15.00%, 18.5 year maturity and a market interest rate of 16.00%? First calculate total future cash flows: PV x (1+r)N = Price of bond of $941.12 x (1 + Market Interest rate 16.00% divided by 2)37 = $16,230.27 less initial purchase price = $941.12 less coupon interest payments = 15.00% * $1000 * 18.50 = $2,775.00 less capital gain (add capital loss) = $1000 - $941.12 = $58.88 = $12,455.27 The yield-to-maturity measures an investor's return from the bond correctly only if these assumptions are true:
The total return is the sum of:
There are two types of interest rate related risks:
These risks offset each other to a certain extent. Which one dominates depends on the bondholder's investment horizon. The shorter the investment horizon, the smaller the coupon reinvestment risk, but the bigger the market price risk. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Macaulay, Modified and Effective Durations
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
Bond duration measures the sensitivity of the full price change to a change in interest rates.
Duration is the weighted average time to receive the present value of each of the bond's coupon and principal payments. For example, a bond with a duration of three means that, on average, it takes three years to receive the present value of the bond's cash flows. Macaulay Duration Frederick Macaulay developed the concept of duration approximately 80 years ago. He demonstrated that a bond's duration was a more appropriate measure of time characteristics than the term to maturity of the bond, because duration incorporates both the repayment of capital at maturity, the size of the coupon and timing of the payments. Macaulay duration is defined as the weighted average time to full recovery of principal and interest payments. The weights are the shares of the full price corresponding to each coupon and principal payment. Alternatively, Macaulay duration can be calculated using a closed-form formula.
Modified Duration Modified duration shows how bond prices move proportionally with small changes in yields. Specifically, modified duration estimates the percentage change in bond price with a change in yield.
-Dmod = the modified duration for the bond Di = yield change in basis points divided by 100 P = beginning price for the bond Modified duration assumes that the price/yield relationship is a straight line. However, the price/yield relationship is convex, not linear. Suppose that the bond has an initial yield of Y0. A tangent line can be drawn to the price/yield relationship at Y0. The slope of the tangent line is related to the duration of the bond. If the yield falls to Y1, the price will rise to P1. Due to the linear assumption, the price change measured by duration is P2 - P0.
To approximate modified duration:
V- = the price if yields declines V+ = the price if yield increases V0 = the initial price For example, consider a 9% coupon 20-year option-free bond selling at 134.6722 to yield 6%. If the yield is decreased by 20 basis points from 6.0% to 5.8%, the price would increase to 137.5888. If the yield increases by 20 basis points, the price would decrease to 131.8439. Thus: ApproxModDur = (137.5888 - 131.8439)/(2 x 134.6722 x 0.002) = 10.66. This tells you that for a 1% change in the required yield, the bond price will change by approximately 10.66%. Macaulay duration is mathematically related to modified duration.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Properties of Bond Duration
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
Bond duration is affected by many variables.
Callable Bonds A callable bond exhibits positive convexity at high yield levels and negative convexity at low yield levels. Negative convexity means that for a large change in interest rates, the amount of the price appreciation is less than the amount of the price depreciation.
Putable Bonds The difference between the value of a putable bond and the value of an otherwise comparable option-free bond is the value of the embedded put option.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Bond Portfolio Duration
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
There are two ways to calculate the duration of a bond portfolio:
To illustrate this calculation, consider the following three-bond portfolio in which all three bonds are option-free:
In this illustration, it is assumed that the next coupon payment for each bond is exactly six months from now (i.e., there is no accrued interest). The market value for the portfolio is $9,609,961. Since each bond is option-free, modified duration can be used.
The portfolio's duration is: 0.416 (3.861) + 0.440 (8.047) + 0.144 (9.168) = 6.47. A portfolio duration of 6.47 means that for a 100 basis point change in the yield for each of the three bonds, the market value of the portfolio will change by approximately 6.47%. Keep in mind that the yield for each of the three bonds must change by 100 basis points for the duration measure to be useful. This is a critical assumption and its importance cannot be overemphasized. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Money Duration of a Bond and the Price Value of a Basis Point
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
Modified duration measures the percentage price change of a bond to a change in its yield-to-maturity. Money duration measures the absolute price change.
To calculate absolute price change: ΔDirty Price = - Money Duration x ΔYield In the U.S., money duration is called dollar duration. It is the approximate dollar change in a bond's price for a 100 basis point change in yield. The price value of a basis point (PVBP) is the absolute change in the price of a bond for a one basis point change in yield. It is simply the money duration of a bond for a one basis point change in yield. Example Scott Marsh from Mass Avenue Research Management purchased a bond for a price of 93.555. This bond has a coupon of 14.70% and a modified duration of 3.00. Given market interest rates of 10.00% and a change in market rates of -66 basis points, what is the price value of a basis point? The answer is the modified duration x 1 basis point x bond price or 3.00 x .0001 x 93.555 = $0.0281 Note: The other information has been placed into this question as a distraction. Don't be fooled by extraneous data! To calculate PVBP:
P- is the full price calculated by lowering the yield-to-maturity by one basis point. P+ is the full price calculated by raising the yield-to-maturity by one basis point. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Bond Convexity
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
Duration is a first approximation of a bond's price or a portfolio's value to rate changes. It does a good job of estimating the percentage price change for a small change in interest rates but the estimation becomes poorer the larger the change in interest rates.
Duration always gives a lower than actual price, the reason being convexity. Thus, a convexity adjustment would take into account the curvature of the price/yield relationship in order to give a more accurate estimated price. To improve the estimate provided by duration, particularly for a large change in yield, a convexitymeasure can be used.
For a hypothetical 9%, 20-year bond selling to yield 6%, for a 20 basis point change in yield, P0 = 134.6722, P- = 137.5888, and P+ = 131.8439 ==> convexity measure = (131.8439 + 137.5888 - 2 x 134.6722)/(134.6722 x 0.0022) = 163.92. Convexity indicates that as yield increases, the price of a bond declines at a declining rate. Given the convexity measure, the convexity adjustment to the duration estimate can be computed; the convexity adjustment is the amount that should be added to the duration estimate for the percentage price change. Convexity Adjustment
Consider a situation where you are using duration to compute the effect of a 250 basis point change in yield, where duration is 6.655 and the convexity adjustment is 1.8271. Using an estimate of modified duration, you determine that the percentage change in price of this bond resulting from a 250 basis point increase in yield should be 2.5 x -6.655 = -16.6375%. Adding the convexity adjustment, the percentage price should change by -16.6375 + 1.8271 = -14.8104%. Summarizing the price change estimates in response to the 250 basis point increase in yield, you have: Duration estimate = -16.63750% Convexity adjustment + 1.8271% Total: - 14.8104% The actual decrease is 14.95%, so the convexity adjustment does improve the estimate. If you estimate the change resulting from a 250 basis point decrease in yield, the results can be summarized as: Duration estimate: 16.6375% Convexity adjustment: + 1.8271% Total: +18.4646% The actual percentage increase in price is 18.62%. The convexity adjustment brings the modified duration estimate closer to the actual percentage change. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Interest Rate Risk and the Investment Horizon
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
Yield Volatility
Prices of fixed income securities are affected by both the level of interest rates and the volatility of interest rates. The risk of a default-free bond stems from two sources - interest rate shifts and risk of changes in the volatility of interest rates. The first type of risk is well-known. Managing interest rate risk requires measuring it first. Duration analysis has become an important tool, allowing portfolio managers to measure the sensitivity of their portfolios to changes in the level of interest rates. The second type of risk is less familiar, although it can represent a major component of the total risk of a fixed-income portfolio. The greater the expected yield volatility, the greater the interest rate risk for a given duration and current value of a position. Investment Horizon, Macaulay Duration, and Interest Rate Risk The investment horizon is essential in measuring the interest rate risk of a fixed-rate bond. When there is a parallel shift to the yield curve, the yield-to-maturity and coupon reinvestment rates are assumed to change by the same amount in the same direction. The Macaulay duration statistic identifies investment horizon so that the losses (or gains) from coupon reinvestment offset the gains (or losses) from market price changes. The duration gap is the difference between the Macaulay duration and the investment horizon.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Credit and Liquidity Risk
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #reading-56-understanding-fixed-income-risk-and-return
A change in yield-to-maturity will cause a change in bond price. What is the source of the change in the yield-to-maturity? The yield-to-maturity on a corporate bond has two components:
Regardless of the source of the yield-to-maturity change, the bond price change caused by a change in the yield-to-maturity will be the same. In practice, there is often interaction between changes in benchmark yields and in the spread over the benchmark. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Credit Risk
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #los-57-a-b #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
Credit risk is the risk of loss of interest and/or principal stemming from a borrower's failure to repay a loan.
Credit risk has two components:
The spread refers to the difference between the yield on a specific bond and a comparable maturity (or duration) Treasury. The part of the risk premium representing the default risk is known as the credit spread. If the perception of risk increases for the issuer or for the industry category representing the issuer, the spread may increase or widen. This risk associated with an increasing credit spread is known as the credit spread risk. If there are more concerns about economic security, the spread will widen (implying that the premium for risk increases). Credit risk could be on account of:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Seniority Ranking and Priority of Claims
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #los-57-c #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
In finance, seniority refers to the order of repayment in the event of a sale or bankruptcy of the issuer. In general, secured debt takes priority over unsecured debt if the issuer goes bankrupt. Within unsecured debt, senior debt ranks ahead of subordinated debt. The seniority ranking of securities results what is called priority of claims.
The priority of claims is not always absolute. It can be influenced by several factors, such as government involvement, leeway accorded to bankruptcy judges, and the bias toward reorganization instead of liquidation. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Credit Ratings
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #los-57-d-e #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
The rating agencies (Moody's, S&P, and Fitch) rate both issuers and issues. Issuer ratings are meant to address an issuer's overall creditworthiness - its risk of default. Ratings for issues incorporate such factors as rankings in the capital structure.
Notching A company's credit rating corresponds to its senior unsecured obligations. A rating agency may notch up secure debt from the company credit rating and notch down subordinated debt. A credit rating agency's notching policy primarily intends to reflect the relative recovery prospects of different instruments issued by the same issuer. Risks in Relying on Agency Ratings There are risks in relying too much on credit agency ratings. Because creditworthiness is dynamic, initial/current ratings do not necessarily reflect the evolution of credit quality over an investor's holding period. Importantly, bond ratings do not always capture price risk because valuations often adjust before ratings change and the notching process may not adequately reflect the price decline of a bond that is lower ranked in the capital structure. Similarly, because ratings primarily reflect the probability of default but not necessarily the severity of loss given default, bonds with the same rating may have significantly different expected losses. And like analysts, credit rating agencies may have difficulty forecasting certain credit-negative outcomes, such as adverse litigation, leveraging corporate transactions, and such low likelihood/high severity events as earthquakes and hurricanes. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Credit Analysis
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #los-57-f-g-h #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
Credit analysts want to assess a company's ability to make timely payments of interest and principal. They tend to focus more on the downside risk given the asymmetry of risk/return, whereas equity analysts focus more on upside opportunity from earnings growth.
The "four Cs" of credit analysis provide a useful framework for evaluating credit risk. Capacity The capacity, or ability to pay, reflects the funds flow from the organization and the generation of cash sufficient to meet the interest and principal repayments. Credit analysis starts with industry analysis followed by company analysis to assess the cash flows or the ability of the issuer to repay its financial obligation. Industry structure. Michael Porter's framework, which is covered in Reading 50 (Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis), can be used to analyze industry structure. Industry fundamentals. These include the industry's sensitivity to macroeconomic factors, its growth prospects, its profitability and its business needs. Company fundamentals. These include the company's competitive position, track record, management's strategy and execution, and ratio analysis. The ratios can be categorized into three groups: profitability and cash flow ratios, leverage ratios, and coverage ratios. How does an analyst who has calculated a ratio know whether it represents good, bad, or indifferent credit quality? The analyst must relate the ratio to the likelihood that the borrower will satisfy all scheduled interest and principal payments in full and on time. In practice, this is accomplished by testing financial ratios as predictors of the borrower's propensity not to pay (to default). For example, a company with high financial leverage is statistically more likely to default than one with low leverage, all other things being equal. Similarly, high fixed-charge coverage implies less default risk than low coverage. After identifying the factors that create high default risk, the analyst can use ratios to rank all borrowers on a relative scale of propensity to default. An issuer's ability to access liquidity is also an important consideration in credit analysis. Collateral Collateral analysis involves not only the traditional pledging of assets to secure the debt, but also the quality and value of those un-pledged assets controlled by the issue. Note that the value and quality of a company's assets may be difficult to observe directly. The key point is to assess the value of the assets relative to the issuer's debt level. Covenants Covenants deal with limitations and restrictions on the borrower's activities. They are important because they impose restrictions on how management operates the company and conducts its financial assets. This term covers both affirmative (obligated to do) and negative (limited in doing) covenants. Character Character relates to the ethical reputation as well as the business qualifications and operating record of the board of directors, management, and executives responsible for the use of the borrowed funds and its repayment. It covers many aspects, such as strategic direction, financial philosophy, conservatism, track record, succession planning, control systems, etc. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Credit Risk vs. Return: Yields and Spreads
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #has-images #los-57-i #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
The higher the credit risk, the greater the required yield and potential return demanded by investors. Over time, bonds with more credit risk offer higher returns but with greater volatility of return than bonds with lower credit risk.
Yield spread is the difference in yield between two securities.
Yield spreads, especially credit spreads, become wider during economic contractions. In times of credit improvement or stability, however, credit spreads can narrow sharply as well. This is known as "flight to quality". Factors that affect yield spreads include: the credit cycle, economic conditions, financial market performance, market making capacity, and supply/demand conditions. How do spread changes affect the price of and return on these bonds? The impact depends on two factors:
A credit curve is essentially the spread over treasuries of various maturities for a single bond issuer. It is typically upward-sloping, meaning the longer the bond maturity, the wider the spread. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Special Considerations of High-Yield, Sovereign, and Municipal Analysis
#basic-concepts #cfa #cfa-level-1 #fixed-income #los-57-i #reading-57-fundamentals-of-credit-analysis
High-Yield Bonds
High-yield bonds are issued by organizations that do not qualify for investment-grade ratings. These issuers must pay a higher interest rate to compensate investors for the increased risks. In analyzing the creditworthiness of high-yield corporate bonds, an analyst should pay close attention to the following:
Equity-Like Approach Traditionally, high-yield bonds have provided a greater return than high-grade bonds, but lower than equities. Similarly, high-yield bond risk has been higher than that of investment grade bonds, but less than equities. High-yield bonds have historically been more highly correlated with equity securities than with investment-grade bonds. Thus, some analysts believe that an equity analysis approach will provide a better framework for high-yield bond analysis than a traditional credit approach. An equity-like approach to high-yield analysis can be helpful. Calculating and comparing enterprise value with EBITDA and debt/EBITDA can show a level of equity "cushion" or support beneath an issuer's debt. Sovereign Debt Two key issues for sovereign analysis:
Both quantitative and qualitative analyses are employed in assessing sovereign risk with ratings performed in both local currency and foreign currency. It is important to evaluate the ratings in both currencies since historically the default rate on foreign currency debt has been greater than the default rate on local (or domestic) currency debt; there is different risk in the two ratings. Generally, if an issuer is planning to default, it is more likely to do so with a foreign currency issue. Thus, the ratings need to be performed for both types of issues. A framework is presented in the reading. It highlights five broad areas:
Municipal Debt There are two basic types of municipal bonds: General obligation (GO) bonds depend on the general creditworthiness of a municipality to repay the debt. The credit analysis has some similarities to sovereign analysis. In general, a municipal analyst should look at employment, industry, and real estate valuation trends needed to generate taxes and fees. Revenue bonds support specific projects. The credit analysis is identical to that of a corporate bond analysis. The focus is to assess whether or not the underlying cash flows from the project will be sufficient to meet the obligations. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Introduction
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-58-a #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
A derivative is a financial instrument that offers a return based on the return of some other underlying asset. In this sense, its return is derived from another instrument. A derivative contract has a limited life, with its payoff typically determined and/or made on the expiration date.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Exchange-Traded versus Over-the-Counter Derivatives
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-58-a #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
Based on the markets where they are created and traded, derivatives can be classified into two groups:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Forward Commitments
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-58-b-c #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
Based on the rights and obligations of the parties that enter into the contract, derivatives can be classified into two groups: forward commitments and contingent claims.
A forward commitment is an agreement between two parties in which one party agrees to buy and the other agrees to sell an asset at a future date at a price agreed on today. In essence, a forward commitment represents a commitment to buy or sell. There are three types of forward commitments.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Contingent Claims
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-58-b-c #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
A contingent claim is a derivative contract with a payoff dependent on the occurrence of a future event. It can be either exchange-traded or over-the-counter.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Purposes and Criticisms of Derivative Markets
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-58-d #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
Some of the main benefits that financial derivatives bring to the market are:
The complexity of derivatives means that sometimes the parties that use them don't understand them well. As a result, they are often used improperly, leading to potentially large losses. This can explain why unknowledgeable investors tend to consider derivatives excessively dangerous. Derivatives are also mistakenly characterized as a form of legalized gambling. This view tends to overlook the benefits of derivatives (e.g., risk management). In fact, derivatives make financial market work better, not worse. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Arbitrage
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-58-e #reading-58-derivative-markets-and-instruments
Arbitrage is a process through which an investor can buy an asset or combination of assets at one price and concurrently sell at a higher price, thereby earning a profit without investing any money or being exposed to any risk.
In a well-functioning market, arbitrage opportunities should not exist. If they do exist, arbitrage activities would quickly eliminate the price differential. The no-arbitrage principle states that any rational price for a financial instrument must exclude arbitrage opportunities. This is the minimal requirement for a feasible or rational price for any financial instrument. There is no free money. The role of arbitrage:
Hedgers vs. Speculators: two parties involved in the risk management process Depending on their prior risk exposures, participants in the derivatives market can be classified into hedgers and speculators.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. The Principle of Arbitrage
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-a #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
Arbitrage means taking advantage of price differences in different markets. In well-functioning markets, arbitrage opportunities are quickly exploited, and the resulting increased buying of underpriced assets and increased selling of overpriced assets return prices to equivalence.
Arbitrage and Derivatives Assume the risk-free rate is 5%. The current price of gold is $300 per ounce and the forward price of gold is $330 in one year's time. Is there an arbitrage opportunity? Here is what you can do:
Hence, a profit of $15 can be made without any risk! In fact, any delivery price above $315 will result in a risk-free profit using this strategy. What if the delivery price is $310?
Again, a profit of $5 can be made without any risk. Investors in the gold market will take advantage of any forward price that is not equal to $315, eventually bring the price to $315, which is known as the arbitrage-free price. The arbitrage principle is the essence of derivative pricing models. Arbitrage and Replication A portfolio composed of the underlying asset and the riskless asset could be constructed to have exactly the same cash flows as a derivative. This portfolio is called the replicating portfolio. Since they have the same cash flows, they would have to sell at the same price (the law of one price). Assume the forward price of gold is $315 in one year's time, and the spot price is $300. You have $300.
Why replicate?
Replication is the essence of arbitrage. Risk Aversion, Risk Neutrality, and Arbitrage-Free Pricing Risk-seeking investors give away a risk premium because they enjoy taking risk. Risk-averse investors expect a risk premium to compensate for the risk. Risk-neutral investors neither give nor receive a risk premium because they have no feelings about risk. Risk-neutral pricing: Suppose you want to price a derivative. The payoff of this derivate can be replicated using the underling asset and risk-free rate. The market price of this derivative and the replicating strategy must be exactly the same under the principle of no arbitrage, regardless of risk preferences. To obtain the derivative price we should assume the investor is risk-neutral, because an investor's risk aversion is not a factor in determining the derivative price. Risk can be eliminated by dynamic hedging in a situation where there is no arbitrage possible. Once risk is eliminated in this way the expected return becomes equal to the risk-free rate for all investors. Assets can be assumed to grow at the risk-free rate and also discounted at the risk-free rate. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. The Concept of Pricing vs. Valuation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-a #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
The value of a forward, futures and swap contract is zero at initiation date. Its price is the fixed contract price. Both price and value are relevant in determining the profit for both parties.
Example Two parties agree to a forward contract to deliver a zero-coupon bond at a price of $97 per $100 par in 3 month. At initiation date:
At the contract's expiration, suppose the underlying zero-coupon bond is selling at a price of $97.25. The long is due to receive from the short an asset worth $97.25, for which a payment to the short of $97 is required.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Pricing and Valuation of Forward Contracts
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-c-d #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
Pricing and Valuation at Expiration At expiration T, the value of a forward contract to the long position is:
The forward price is the price that a long will pay the short at expiration and expect the short to deliver the asset. Pricing and Valuation at Initiation Date There is no cash exchange at the beginning of the contract and hence the value of the contract at initiation is zero.
Consider a forward contract on a non-dividend paying stock that matures in 6 months. The current stock price is $50 and the 6-month interest rate is 4% per annum. Compute the forward price, F. Solution: Assuming semi-annual compounding, F = 50 x 1.02 = 51.0. If we add benefits ʇ (dividends, interest, and convenience yield), and costs θ the forward price of an asset at initiation becomes
F = 1018.86 x 1.042 - 50 x 1.04 - 50 = $1,000 Pricing and Valuation during the Life of the Contract The value of a forward contract after initiation and during the term of the contract change as the price of the underlying asset (S) changes. The value (profit/loss) of a forward contract between initiation and expiration is the current price of the asset less the present value of the forward price (at expiration). |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Forward Rate Agreements
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-e #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
A forward rate agreement (FRA) is a forward contract in which one party, the long, agrees to pay a fixed interest payment at a future date and receive an interest payment at a rate to be determined at expiration. It is a forward contract on an interest rate (not on a bond or a loan).
The fixed rate is also called the forward contract rate. The interest rate to be determined at expiration is also called the underlying rate.
The buyer effectively has agreed to borrow an amount of money in the future at the stated forward (contract) rate. The seller has effectively locked in a lending rate. The buyer of a FRA profits from an increase in interest rates. The seller of a FRA profits from a decline in rates. Example Shell and Barclays enters into the following FRA:
By convention, this FRA is also referred to as a 1 x 3. At the expiration of the FRA in 30 days:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Why do Forward and Futures Prices Differ?
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-f #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
In assigning a forward price, we set the price such that the value of the contract is zero at the start. During the life of the forward contract, the value will fluctuate as market conditions change. The original contract price, however, remains the same.
Unlike forward contract prices, however, futures prices fluctuate in an open and competitive market. The marking-to-market process results in each futures contract being terminated every day and reinitiated. If we ignore the credit risk issue (futures contracts are essentially free of default risk as they are settled daily but forward contracts are subject to default risk), we should conclude that:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Pricing and Valuation of Swap Contracts
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-g-h #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
Swaps are derivative securities in the form of agreements between two counterparties to exchange cash flows over a period of time, depending on the values of specified market variables.
Example Party A agrees to pay a fixed rate of interest on $10 million each year for 3 years to Party B. In return, Party B agrees to pay a floating rate of interest on $10 million each year for 3 years to Party A. A swap involves a series of payments over its tenor, and can be considered a series of forward contracts. In contrast, forwards, futures and options only involve a single payment or two payments (i.e., when the option is purchased and when it is exercised). In general, neither party pays any money to the other at the initiation of a swap. A swap has zero value at the start. A swap can be viewed as combining a series of forward contracts into a single transaction. However, there are some small differences. For example, swaps are a series of equal fixed payments, whereas the component contracts of a series of forward contracts would almost always be priced at different fixed rates. In this context we often refer to a swap as a series of off-market forward contracts, reflecting the fact that the implicit forward contracts that make up the swap are all priced at the swap fixed rate and not at the rate at which they would normally be priced in the market. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. The Value of a European Option at Expiration
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-i-j #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
Almost anything with a random outcome can have an option on it. The underlying instruments for options are stocks, stock indices, bonds, interest rates, currencies, futures, commodities, etc.
Every option is either a call option or a put option. Options are created only by selling and buying. Therefore, for every owner (buyer) of an option, there is a seller (writer).
There are two fundamental kinds of options:
The American option cannot be worth less than the European option, because the owner of the American option also has the right to exercise the option before expiration if he desires. Put it in another way, you can do with an American option anything you can do with a European option, plus you can exercise early. Thus, the American option gives the owner more flexibility. Note: The terms "European" and "American" are not associated with geographical locations. Moneyness refers to the potential profit or loss from the immediate exercise of an option. An option may be:
Intrinsic value is the value of the option if it is exercised immediately. Option Payoffs The easiest time to determine an option's value is at expiration. At that point there is no future; only the present matters. An option's value at expiration is called its payoff. For a European option at expiration:
Long call strategy. The worst that can happen is losing the entire premium (value) of the option. Potential profits are theoretically unlimited.
Short call strategy. The best thing that can happen to the seller of a call is never to hear any more about the transaction after collecting the initial premium. Potential losses from selling a call are theoretically unlimited.
Long put strategy. The smaller the stock price (ST), the greater the put option value.
Short put strategy.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Factors that Affect the Value of an Option
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-k #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
The previous discussion tells us that the price is somewhere between zero and maximum, which is either the underlying price, the exercise price, or the present value of the exercise price - a fairly wide range of possibilities. The range will be tightened up a little on the low side by establishing a lower bound on the option price.
For American options, which are exercisable immediately: C0 >= Max (0, S0 - X) P0 >= Max (0, X - S0) If the option is in-the-money and is selling for less than its intrinsic value, it can be bought and exercised to net an immediate risk-free profit. However, European options cannot be exercised early; thus, there is no way for market participants to exercise an option selling for too little with respect to its intrinsic value. Investors have to determine the lower bound of a European call by constructing a portfolio consisting of a long call and risk-free bond and a short position in the underlying asset. First the investor needs the ability to buy and sell a risk-free bond with a face value equal to the exercise price and current value equal to the present value of the exercise price. The investor buys the European call and the risk-free bond and sells short (borrows the asset and sells it) the underlying asset. At expiration the investor shall buy back the asset.
This combination produces a non-negative value at expiration, so its current value must be non-negative. For this situation to occur, the call price has to be worth at least the underlying price minus the present value of the exercise price:
The lower bound of a European put is established by constructing a portfolio consisting of a long put, a long position in the underlying, and the issuance of a zero-coupon bond. This combination produces a non-negative value at expiration so its current value must be non-negative. For this situation to occur, the put price has to be at least as much as the present value of the exercise price minus the underlying price.
For both calls and puts, if this lower bound is negative, we invoke the rule that an option price can be no lower than zero. Example
Solution
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 9. Put-Call Parity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-i #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
First, consider an option strategy referred to as a fiduciary call, which consists of a European call and a risk-free bond that matures on the option expiration day and has a face value (X) equal to the exercise price of the call.
At expiration the fiduciary call will end with X or ST, whichever is greater. This combination allows protection against downside losses and is thus faithful to the notion of preserving capital. Then, consider an option strategy known as a protective put, which consists of a European put and the underlying asset.
So, at expiration, the protective put is worth X or ST, whichever is greater. Thus, the fiduciary call and protective put end up with the same value. They are therefore identical combinations. To avoid arbitrage, their values today must be the same.
This equation is called put-call parity. It does not say that the puts and calls are equivalent, but it does show an equivalence (parity) of a call/bond portfolio and a put/underlying portfolio. Note that the put and call must have the same underlying, exercise price and expiration date. By re-arranging the above equation:
Because the right side of this equation is equivalent to a call, it is often referred to as a synthetic call. It consists of a long put, a long position in the underlying, and a short position in the risk-free bond. There are numerous other combinations that can be constructed. For example, the put can be isolated as:
The right side is a synthetic put, which consists of a long call, a short position in the underlying, and a long position in the risk-free bond. Another example is Synthetic positions enable investors to price options, because they produce the same results as options and have known prices. Consider the following example: a European call with an exercise price of $30 expires in 90 days. A European put with the same exercise price, expiration date and underlying is selling for $6. The underlying is selling for $40, and the risk-free rate is 10%. Based on the information, you can compute the value of the synthetic call: c0 = p0 + S0 - X/(1 + r)T = 6 + 40 - 30/(1 + 10%)90/365 = $16.7 (Note the time to expiration T = 90/365 = 0.2466). Since the synthetic call and the actual call have the same payoff, they must have the same price as well. Therefore, the price of the call should be $16.70. Synthetic positions also tell how to exploit mispricing of options relative ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 10. Put-Call-Forward Parity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-m #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
Assume that:
Consider two portfolios. Portfolio A consists of a long call and a long position in a zero-coupon bond with face value of X - F(0, T). Portfolio B consists of a long put and a long forward.
As the two portfolios have exactly the same payoff, their initial investments should be the same as well. That is:
This equation is put-call parity for options on forward contracts. As F(0, T) = S0(1 + r)T, we rearrange the equation as the follows:
Consider the following example: T = 90 days, r = 5%, X = $95, S0 = $100, and the call price is $10. The put price should be c0 + X/(1 + r)T - S0 = 10 + 95/(1 + 0.05) (90/365) - 100 = $3.86. Similarly, we can compute the call price given the price of the put. Consider another example. The options and a forward contract expire in 50 days. The risk-free rate is 6%, and the exercise price is 90. The forward price is 92, and the call price is 5.5. p0 = c0 + [X - F(0, T)]/(1 + r)T = 5.5 + (90 - 92)/1.06(50/365) = 3.52 Note that in this case X < F(0, T), which means that we short the bond instead of buying the bond as in portfolio A above. Continue with those assumptions at the beginning of this subject. Consider a portfolio consisting of a long call, short put and a long position in a zero-coupon bond with face value of X - F(0, T). At expiration the value of the portfolio is:
As a forward contract's payoff at expiration is also ST - F(0, T), the portfolio's initial value must be equal to the initial value of the forward contract (which is 0).
Solving for F(0, T), we obtain the equation for the forward price in terms of the call, put, and bond. Therefore, a synthetic forward contract is a combination of a long call, a short put and a zero-coupon bond with face value (X - F(0, T)). Note that we may either long or short this bond, depending on whether the exercise price of these options is lower or higher than the forward price. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 11. Binomial Valuation of Options
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #has-images #los-59-m #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
In finance, the binomial options model provides a generalisable numerical method for the valuation of options. The model differs from other option pricing models in that it uses a "discrete-time" model of the varying price over time of financial instruments; the model is thus able to handle a variety of conditions for which other models cannot be applied. Essentially, option valuation here is via application of the risk neutrality assumption over the life of the option, as the price of the underlying instrument evolves.
The binomial pricing model uses a "discrete-time framework" to trace the evolution of the option's key underlying variable via a binomial lattice (tree), for a given number of time steps between valuation date and option expiration. Each node in the lattice represents a possible price of the underlying at a particular point in time. This price evolution forms the basis for the option valuation. The valuation process is iterative, starting at each final node, and then working backwards through the tree to the first node (valuation date), where the calculated result is the value of the option. Option valuation using this method is, as described, a three step process:
We start off by having one binomial period for a European call option. Define:
Formulas:
We assume that the stock price will only take two possible values at the expiration date of the option. In our example:
Step 1: Diagram Stock Price Dynamics and Option Values on Trees Based on this information, tree diagrams for the stock value and call option payoffs (state dependent) would be drawn as follows:
Step 2: Compute Risk Neutral Probabilities of Up and Down States μ = (90/80) = 1.125 d = (75/80) = 0.9375 π = [(1.06)0.5 - 0.9375] / (1.125 - 0.9375) = 0.4912 Step 3: Compute Expected Value of Call Option c0 = [0.4912 $5 + (1 - 0.4912) $0] / (1.06)0.5 = $2.385 Therefore, today's value of the 1-period option is $2.385. Alternatively, we can use combination of Stocks and Calls to create state-independent payoffs and then determine the no-arbitrage value of the option rights. Step 1: Calculate the hedge ratio (shares per call) ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 12. American Option Pricing
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-o #reading-59-basics-of-derivative-pricing-and-valuation
American options can be exercised early. Their prices must always be no less than those of otherwise equivalent European options.
American call options:
American call options, however, are never exercised early unless there is a cash flow on the underlying. The extra value of an American option, if any, comes from the fact that it can be exercised immediately. American put options:
American put options nearly always have a possibility of early exercise, so they ordinarily sell for more than their European counterparts. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Covered Call Strategy and Protective Put Strategy
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #derivatives #los-59-o #los-60-a-b #reading-60-risk-management-of-option-strategies
We discussed the payoffs of individual options in Reading 59. Options can be combined with the underlying to shape the risk and return characteristics of the underlying.
Covered Call: Stock plus a Short Call In covered call transactions, a trader is generally assumed to already own a stock and writes a call option on the underlying stock. The term "covered" means that the potential obligation in selling the call (that is, to deliver the underlying) is covered by the underlying. When the call is exercised, the underlying is immediately available to be delivered to the buyer of the call. The value at expiration of the covered call equals the value of the underlying plus the value of the short call: Value of covered call = value of underlying + value of short call = ST - MAX(0, ST - X) = ST if ST <= X, or X if ST > X This strategy is generally undertaken as an income-enhancement technique, and the intention is to keep the premium without surrendering the stock through exercise. However, the writer of the covered call is actually exchanging the change of large gains on the stock position in favor of income from selling the option. Example
Solution
If the stock price finishes at:
Protective Put: Stock plus a Long Put A portfolio of stock has a potentially wide range of gains and losses. If all the stocks in the portfolio lost all of their value, the value of the portfolio would also lose all of its value. In other words, it would be possible to lose everything that had been invested. On the other hand, as the stocks in the portfolio increase in value, the value of the portfolio increases. Since the value of a share of stock has (theoretically) no upper limit, the value of a portfolio has no upper limit. A protective put (portfolio insurance) is an investment management technique designed to protect a stock portfolio from severe drops in value. It involves holding a stock portfolio and buying a put option on the portfolio. Because the price of a put is always positive, it is clear that an insured portfolio costs more than the uninsured stock portfolio alone. At expiration, the value of the insured portfolio is: ST + PT + ST + MAX {0, X - ST}. As you can see, the strategy offers protection against large drops in value. This strategy is like a long position in a call. A trader can buy a call and invest the extra proceeds in a bond in order to replicate a position in an insured portfolio. Portfolio insurance limits the amount of loss on a portfolio by balancing that loss with the gain from a LONG put option. It also reduces the potential gain on a portfolio as a result of the premium paid for the put option. The "insurance" part of portfolio insurance, then, is th... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Alternative investments
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #los-61-a-b-c #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
Stocks, bonds and cash are the most commonly known traditional investments. Alternative investments may encompass any non-traditional investments of financial assets such as hedge funds, private equity, venture capital, real estate, commodities, and other assets.
Some of the distinctive characteristics of alternative investments compared with traditional investments:
There are two basic investment strategies. Passive managers "buy-and-hold". There are very limited ongoing buying and selling actions. Their portfolios are expected to generate Beta return. Most alternative investment managers use active, alpha-seeking strategies. The assumption is inefficiencies exist that can be exploited to earn positive return after adjusting for beta risk. These active strategies include absolute return, market segmentation and concentrated portfolios. Sharpe ratios and many downside risk measures are commonly used to measure risk and return of alternative investments. Despite unique risks and considerations, alternative investments can be useful tools to improve the risk-return characteristics of an investment portfolio. They can increase diversification and reduce volatility given low correlations to more traditional investments. Many alternative investments use a partnership structure.
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Hedge funds
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #los-61-d-e-f #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
To "hedge", according to Webster's dictionary, is "a means of protection or defense (as against financial loss), or to minimize the risk of a bet". The term "hedge fund" includes a multitude of skill-based investment strategies with a broad range of risk and return objectives. A common element is the use of investment and risk management skills to seek positive returns regardless of market direction.A hedge fund is a private "pool" of capital for accredited investors only and organized using the limited partnership legal structure. The general partner is usually the money manager and is likely to have a very high percentage of his/her own net worth invested in the fund. The fund has an offering memorandum, which is intended to provide much of the necessary information to support an investor's due diligence. Among several topics, the offering memorandum will specify the trading style, hedging strategies, and instruments to be employed by the fund at the discretion of the general partner (e.g., being long and /or short stock; use of puts, calls, and futures; use of OTC derivatives). Hedge funds utilize alternative investment strategies for the purpose of achieving superior returns relative to risk (i.e., return vs. standard deviation). Performance objectives range from conservative to aggressive. The degree of hedging varies. In fact, some do not hedge at all while others simply use S&P put options and futures in lieu of shorting equities. Consequently, there is a broad spectrum of expected risk and return within the hedge fund universe. Hedge Fund Strategies Hedge funds can be classified in a variety of ways. Here is one way of classification (by investment strategy):
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Private equity
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #los-61-d-e #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
Private equity firms generally buy companies, repair them, enhance them, and sell them on. By definition, these private equity acquisitions and investments are illiquid and are longer term in nature. Consequently, the capital is raised through private partnerships which are managed by entities known as private equity firms.
Private Equity Structure and Fees A private equity firm is typically made up of limited partners (LPs) and one general partner (GP). The LPs are the outside investors who provide the capital. They are called limited partners in the sense that their liability extends only to the capital they contribute. GPs are the professional investors who manage the private equity firm and deploy the pool of capital. They are responsible for all parts of the investment cycle including deal sourcing and origination, investment decision-making and transaction structuring, portfolio management (the act of overseeing the investments that they have made) and exit strategies. The GP charges a management fee based on the LPs? committed capital. Generally, after the LPs have recovered 100% of their invested capital, the remaining proceeds are split between the LPs and the GP with 80% going to LPs and 20% to the GP. The clawback provision gives the LPs the right to reclaim a portion of the GP's carried interest in the event that losses from later investments cause the GP to withhold too much carried interest. Private Equity Strategies Private equity investors have four main investment strategies. 1. The leveraged buyout (LBO) is a strategy of equity investment whereby a company is acquired from the current shareholders, typically with the use of financial leverage. A buyout fund seeks companies that are undervalued with high predictable cash flow, low leverage and operating inefficiencies. If it can improve the business, it can sell the company or its parts, or it can pay itself a nice dividend or pay down some company debt to deleverage. In a management buyout (MBO), the current management team is involved in the acquisition. Not only is a far larger share of executive pay tied to the performance of the business, but top managers may also be required to put a major chunk of their own money into the deal and have an ownership mentality rather than a corporate mentality. Management can focus on getting the company right without having to worry about shareholders. 2. Venture capital is financing for privately held companies, typically in the form of equity and/or long-term debt. It becomes available when financing from banks and public debt or equity markets is either unavailable or inappropriate. Venture capital investing is done in many stages from seed through mezzanine. These stages can be characterized by where they occur in the development of the venture itself.
3. Development capital (minority equity investments) earns profits from funding business growth or restructuring. 4. Distressed investing. A distressed opportunity typically arises when a company, unable to meet all its debts, files for Chapter 11 (reorganization) or Chapter 7 (liquidation) bankruptcy. Investors who understand the true risks and values involved can scoop up these securities or claims at discounted prices, seeing the glow beneath the tarnish. Exit Strateg... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Real estate
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #has-images #los-61-d-e #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
In general, real estate refers to buildable lands and buildings, including residential homes, raw land and income-producing properties (such as warehouses, office and apartment buildings). Real estate is a type of tangible assets, which are investment assets that can be seen and touched. In contrast, financial assets are only recorded as pieces of paper.
Characteristics of real estate as an investable asset class:
Forms of Real Estate Investment They may be classified along two dimensions, debt or equity based, and in private or public markets. There are many variations within the basic forms.
Investment Categories Residential properties: an individual or a family purchases a home. In most cases an financial institution makes a direct debt investment in the home by offering a mortgage. Commercial real estate: a direct equity and/or debt investment is made into a property which is then managed to generate economic benefit to the parties. REIT investing: mortgage REITs invest in mortgages and equity REITs invest in commercial and residential properties. Mortgage-backed securities (MBS): securitization of mortgages. Timberland and farmland. Performance and Diversification Benefits There are different type... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Commodities and other altenative investments
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #los-61-d-e #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
Commodities include agricultural products, energy products and metals. Returns are based on changes in price and do not include an income stream such as dividends, interests, or rent.
Most investors do not want to get involved in storing commodities such as cattle or crude oil. A common investment objective is to purchase indirectly those real assets that should provide a good hedge against inflation risk. Another investment objective is for portfolio diversification. Commodity derivatives are financial instruments that derive their value from the value of the underlying commodities. They include commodity futures, forwards, options and swaps. There are also other means of achieving commodity exposure. Commodity spot prices are determined by market supply and demand. The price of a commodity futures contract is determined by the spot price, risk-free rate, storage costs and convenience yield.
Three sources of return for each commodity futures contract:
Other alternative investments include collectibles such as antiques and fine arts, fine wine, stamps and coins, jewelry and watches, etc. Collectibles usually:
There are a few price indices for different collectibles. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Risk management overview
#alternative-investments #cfa #cfa-level-1 #los-61-g #reading-61-introduction-to-alternative-investments
Managing risks associated with alternative investments can be challenging because these investments are often characterized by asymmetric risk and return profiles, limited transparency, and illiquidity.
Traditional risk and return measures such as mean return, standard deviation of returns, and beta may not provide an adequate picture of characteristics of alternative investments. Moreover, these measures may not be reliable or representative of specific investments. Operational, financial, counterparty, and liquidity risks may be key considerations for those investing in alternative investments. It is critical to do due diligence to assess whether (a) a potential investment is in compliance with its prospectus; (b) the appropriate organizational structure and policies for managing investments, operations, risk, and compliance are in place; and (c) the fund terms appear reasonable. The inclusion of alternative investments in a portfolio, including the amounts to allocate, should be considered in the context of an investor's risk-return objectives, constraints, and preferences |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
status | not learned | measured difficulty | 37% [default] | last interval [days] | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
repetition number in this series | 0 | memorised on | scheduled repetition | ||||
scheduled repetition interval | last repetition or drill |
Subject 1. CFA Institute Professional Conduct Program
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-1-code-of-ethics-and-spc
The basic structure for enforcing the Code and Standards: Rules of Procedure.
The Disciplinary Review Committee (DRC) enforces the Code and Standards. Professional Conduct staff monitor compliance through Professional Conduct Statements, public complaints, public information, and media reports. The rules related to information-gathering and conviction follow a criminal justice system approach. The procedures require a careful investigation of the charges followed by a hearing, findings and appeal. An overview follows:
Authorized sanctions include suspension or revocation of membership/designation, private/public censure, and private reprimand. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. The Six Components of the Code of Ethics
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-1-code-of-ethics-and-spc
Members and Candidates must:
The Code of Ethics establishes the framework for ethical decision-making in the investment profession. It applies to CFA Institute's members, CFA charterholders and CFA candidates. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. The Seven Standards of Professional Conduct
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-1-code-of-ethics-and-spc
I. PROFESSIONALISM
A. Knowledge of the Law. Members and candidates must understand and comply with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations (including the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct) of any government, regulatory organization, licensing agency, or professional association governing their professional activities. In the event of conflict, members and candidates must comply with the more strict law, rule, or regulation. Members and candidates must not knowingly participate or assist in and must dissociate from any violation of such laws, rules, or regulations. B. Independence and Objectivity. Members and candidates must use reasonable care and judgment to achieve and maintain independence and objectivity in their professional activities. Members and candidates must not offer, solicit, or accept any gift, benefit, compensation, or consideration that reasonably could be expected to compromise their own or another's independence and objectivity. C. Misrepresentation. Members and candidates must not knowingly make any misrepresentations relating to investment analysis, recommendations, actions, or other professional activities. D. Misconduct. Members and candidates must not engage in any professional conduct involving dishonesty, fraud, or deceit or commit any act that reflects adversely on their professional reputation, integrity, or competence. II. INTEGRITY OF CAPITAL MARKETS A. Material Nonpublic Information. Members and candidates who possess material nonpublic information that could affect the value of an investment must not act or cause others to act on the information. B. Market Manipulation. Members and candidates must not engage in practices that distort prices or artificially inflate trading volume with the intent to mislead market participants. III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS A. Loyalty, Prudence, and Care. Members and candidates have a duty of loyalty to their clients and must act with reasonable care and exercise prudent judgment. Members and candidates must act for the benefit of their clients and place their clients' interests before their employer's or their own interests. B. Fair Dealing. Members and candidates must deal fairly and objectively with all clients when providing investment analysis, making investment recommendations, taking investment action, or engaging in other professional activities. C. Suitability.
D. Performance Presentation. When communicating investment performance information, members or candidates must make reasonable efforts to ensure that it is fair, accurate, and complete. E. Preservation of Confidentiality. Members and candidates must keep information about current, former, and prospective clients confidential unless:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Standard I (A) Knowledge of the Law
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
I. PROFESSIONALISM
A. Knowledge of the Law. Members and Candidates must understand and comply with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations (including CFA Institute's Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct) of any government, regulatory organization, licensing agency, or professional association governing their professional activities. In the event of conflict, Members and Candidates must comply with the more strict law, rule, or regulation. Members and candidates must not knowingly participate or assist in and must dissociate from any violation of such laws, rules, or regulations. This standard adopts principles that apply to the general activities of members and candidates. As with any service there are certain rules and regulations that members and candidates need to abide by, although they are not required to have detailed knowledge of all laws. A. Relationship between the Code and Standards and local law. Members and candidates should always aspire to the highest level of ethical conduct. This statement assists members in avoiding legal and ethical traps and violations of the Code of Ethics. In general, members in all countries should comply at all times with the Code and Standards. Since laws in different countries may establish different standards, the rule of thumb is to choose the stricter regulations.
Example You are working in the foreign office of a U.S.-based firm. Analysts in this foreign country routinely solicit insider information and use it as the basis for trading decisions. You are told that this is not illegal in this country. In this case, the Code and Standards are stricter. They prohibit use of material nonpublic information. You should refrain from trading on the basis of insider information. B. Don't participate or assist in violations. Don't knowingly break or help others break laws. If a member:
Note:
Example An associate of yours is engaging in illegal trading practices and he tells you to refrain from disclosing this because it will make the firm look bad and it is highly profitable. You should choose one of the three actions above. If you seek legal counsel and are told that the activity is actually not illegal, you have met your obligation. This assumes that you believe the legal counsel to be competent. If you report your associa... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Standard I (B) Independence and Objectivity
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
I. PROFESSIONALISM
B. Independence and Objectivity. Members and Candidates must use reasonable care and judgment to achieve and maintain independence and objectivity in their professional activities. Members and Candidates must not offer, solicit, or accept any gift, benefit, compensation, or consideration that reasonably could be expected to compromise their own or another's independence and objectivity. Every member must avoid situations that may result in a potential conflict of interest. External sources may try to influence the investment process by offering investment managers a variety of perks. Excessive gifts or lavish investor relation functions could prejudice a member's opinions about a sponsor. One type of benefit is the allocation of shares in oversubscribed IPOs to investment managers for their personal accounts. Every member shall avoid situations that might cause or be perceived to cause a loss of independence or objectivity in recommending investments or taking investment action. Modest gifts and entertainment are acceptable. For example, gifts that do not exceed $100 may be accepted, as well as entertainment. Gifts from clients can be distinguished from gifts given by other parties seeking to influence a member to the detriment of clients. Gifts from clients are deemed less likely to impair a member's independence than gifts from other parties seeking to influence the member's outlook. Members and candidates must disclose to their employers any such benefits from clients. Example 1 You are an analyst for the banking industry. The head of investor relations for one of the larger firms in this industry offers to take you to dinner at a posh restaurant and discuss the upcoming quarterly earnings figures. He provides you with a new state-of-the-art titanium golf club as his limo drops you off at the end of the evening. He calls you the next day to ask if your report on his firm is progressing and indicates that there is a job waiting for you at the bank if you decide to leave your current position. First, the bank officer may have violated his fiduciary duty to his shareholders if he provided you with material nonpublic information. Regardless, you have been wined and dined and received a gift and a job offer from a senior officer of a firm you evaluate. Even if these inducements do not compromise your independence and objectivity, they may provide that perception. This violates the standard. Example 2 An analyst follows the stock of company XYZ. He is invited by XYZ for a visit to the company. XYZ pays all travel expenses for him. In general, when allowing companies to pay for expenses, analysts should ensure that such arrangements do not impinge on their independence and objectivity. In this case, as long as the trip is strictly for business without lavish hospitality, such payment is acceptable. Example 3 An analyst is asked by a firm's executives to issue favorable recommendations to secure the client's business. The analyst should conduct the review and make the recommendation based on his or her own independent and objective view. Note that members may experience pressure from their own firms to issue favorable reviews of certain companies. In a full-service investment house, the corporate finance department may be an underwriter for a company's securities and be loath to antagonize that company by publishing negative research reports. Example 4 Steve, a portfolio manager, directs a large amount of his commission business to a London brokerage house. In appreciation for all the business, the London brokerage house gives Steve two tickets to travel anywhere in Europe. Steve fails to disclose receiving this package to his supervisor. Steve has violated the standard because accepting these perks, worth more than $100, may hinder his independence and objectivity. Procedures for... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Standard I (C) Misrepresentation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
I. PROFESSIONALISM
C. Misrepresentation. Members and Candidates must not knowingly make any misrepresentations relating to investment analysis, recommendations, actions, or other professional activities. Members and candidates shall not make any statements, orally or in writing, that misrepresent:
A misrepresentation is any untrue statement of a fact or any statement that is otherwise false or misleading. This standard relates to misrepresentations by members about their qualifications and services, and it disallows any misleading guarantees about investments and their returns. Members and candidates shall not make or imply, orally or in writing, any assurances or guarantees regarding any investment except to communicate accurate information regarding the terms of the investment instrument and the issuer's obligations under the instrument. It prohibits statements or assumptions that an investment is "guaranteed," or that superior returns can be expected based on the member's past success. This standard applies to oral representations, advertising, electronic communications (including web pages and emails) and written materials (whether publicly disseminated or not). Note: This standard does not rule out correct statements that some investments are actually guaranteed in some way with guaranteed returns. Examples of these types of investments would be insurance contracts or short-term treasury securities. This standard also prohibits plagiarism in the preparation of material for distribution to employers, associates, clients, prospects or the general public. Plagiarism involves copying or using substantially the same materials as those prepared by others without acknowledging the source of that material. The only exception is copying factual information, as published by several recognized financial institutions, as well as statistical information.
In ethical terms, a member or candidate indulging in plagiarism is not conducting himself or herself with integrity. By plagiarizing, he or she is not only stealing the ideas of others, but also exposing himself or herself to violations of other standards by making recommendations that may not have a reasonable basis and may not avoid material misrepresentations. Procedures for compliance Members can prevent unintentional misrepresentations of the qualifications of services the member or the member's firm is capable of performing if each member understands the limit of the individual's or firm's capabilities and the need to be accurate and complete in presentations. Firms can provide guidance for employees who make written or oral presentations to clients or potential clients by providing a written list of the firm's available services and a description of the firm's qualification, and compensations that are both accurate and suitab... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Standard I (D) Misconduct
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
I. PROFESSIONALISM
D. Misconduct. Members and Candidates must not engage in any professional conduct involving dishonesty, fraud, or deceit, or commit any act that reflects adversely on their professional reputations, integrity, or competence. Members and candidates shall not compromise the integrity of the CFA designation, or the integrity or validity of the CFA examinations. Standard I (A) states the obligation to comply with all applicable laws and regulations. This standard addresses personal behavior that will reflect poorly on the profession as a whole. Any act that involves lying, cheating, stealing, or other dishonest conduct, if the offence reflects adversely on a member or candidate's professional (not personal) activities, would violate the standard. Procedures for compliance Members and candidates should encourage their employers to:
Example 1 An investment advisor executes excessive trading volume to generate fees. He tells clients that the high level of trading in their discretionary accounts is needed to maintain proper diversification. If this statement is misrepresentative, the advisor is clearly engaging in professional misconduct. Example 2 A portfolio manager has three martinis at lunch and returns to the office to resume his regular duties. If the manager's judgment is impaired and he is engaging in investment decision-making activities, he is in violation of this standard. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 5. Standard II (A) Material Nonpublic Information
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
II. INTEGRITY OF CAPITAL MARKETS
A. Material Nonpublic Information. Members and Candidates who possess material nonpublic information that could affect the value of an investment must not act or cause others to act on that information. Information is material if its disclosure may affect the price of a security, or if reasonable investors would want to know the information before investing. Topics which should be considered material in an insider trading context include:
The source or relative reliability of the information also determines materiality. The less reliable a source, the less likely the information provided would be considered material. Information is nonpublic if it has not been disseminated to the marketplace in general, or if investors have not had an opportunity to react to the information. Note that disclosing the information to a selected group of analysts does not make it public. For example, a disclosure made to a room full of analysts does not make the disclosed information "public." Note that this standard prohibits use of material nonpublic information, not:
Members are prohibited from seeking out or using any inside information in analyzing investments, making investment recommendations, or making investment decisions if:
Mosaic Theory Insider trading violations should not result when a perceptive analyst reaches a conclusion about a corporate action or event through an analysis of public information and items of nonmaterial nonpublic information (i.e., a "mosaic" of information). Under mosaic theory, financial analysts are free to act without risking liability. That is, a financial analyst may use nonpublic information as the basis for investment recommendations and decisions even if that conclusion would have been material inside information had it been communicated directly to the analyst by a company. Procedures for compliance If members receive inside information in confidence, they shall make reasonable efforts to achieve public dissemination of material nonpublic information disclosed in breach of duty. This effort usually means encouraging the issuing company to make the information public. Members and their firms should adopt written compliance procedures designed to prevent trading while in the possession of material nonpublic information. The most common and widespread approach to preventing insider trading by employees is an information barrier known as a "fire wall." The purpose of a fire wall is to prevent communication of material nonpublic information and other sensitive information from one department of a firm to other departments. The minimum elements of such a precaution include the following:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 6. Standard II (B) Market Manipulation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
II. INTEGRITY OF CAPITAL MARKETS
B. Market Manipulation. Members and Candidates must not engage in practices that distort prices or artificially inflate trading volume with the intent to mislead market participants. Market manipulation is a deliberate attempt to interfere with the free and fair operation of the market. It includes practices that distort security prices or trading volume with the intent to deceive people or entities that rely on information in the market. Market manipulation examples include:
The intent of the action is critical to determining whether it is a violation of this standard. The standard does not prohibit legitimate trading strategies that exploit a difference in market power, information, or other market inefficiencies. It also does not prohibit transactions done for tax purposes (e.g., selling and immediately buying back a particular stock). |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 7. Standard III (A) Loyalty, Prudence, and Care
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS
A. Loyalty, Prudence, and Care. Members and Candidates have a duty of loyalty to their clients and must act with reasonable care and exercise prudent judgment. Members and Candidates must act for the benefit of their clients and place their clients' interests before their employer's or their own interests. This standard relates principally to members who have discretionary authority over the management of client's assets. Fiduciary duty refers to the obligations of loyalty and care in regard to the responsibility of managing someone else's assets. A fiduciary duty is a position of trust.
Fiduciary standards apply to a large number of persons in varying capacities, but exact duties may differ in many respects, depending on the nature of the relationship with the client or the type of account under which the assets are managed. The first step in fulfilling a fiduciary duty is to determine what the responsibility is and the identity of the "client" to whom the fiduciary duty is owed.
A fiduciary must make investment decisions in the context of the portfolio as a whole rather than by individual investments within the portfolio. The fiduciary should thoroughly consider the risk of loss, potential gains, diversification, liquidity and returns. Often a manager may direct clients' trades through a particular broker because an investment manager often has discretion over the selection of brokers. The broker may provide research services that provide a broad benefit to the manager. The manager has thus used "soft dollars" to purchase beneficial services through brokerage, which is an asset to the manager's clients. Since the manager would expect to purchase research services anyway, the soft dollar arrangement is not necessarily inappropriate. The manager must seek the best price and execution, and disclose any soft dollar arrangements. Procedures for compliance
Example 1 A client anxiously tells you that he needs to liquidate a bond portfolio immediately because he needs funds to pay for an operation for a relative. The bonds are highly liquid, but ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 8. Standard III (B) Fair Dealing
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS
B. Fair Dealing. Members and Candidates must deal fairly and objectively with all clients when providing investment analysis, making investment recommendations, taking investment action, or engaging in other professional activities. "Fairly" implies that members must not discriminate against or favor any clients. Fairness shall be maintained in quality and timing of services, and allocation of investment opportunities. The term "fairly," rather than "equally,", is used because it would be physically impossible to reach all customers at the same exact instant, and not all recommendations or investment actions are suitable for all clients. Members and candidates are NOT required to give the same level of services to all clients. For example, you can give more information and research to discretionary clients than to transaction-only clients. Members and candidates are required to adhere to the standard in:
Procedures for compliance
Members and their firms are required to take the following steps to ensure that adequate trade allocation practices are followed:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 9. Standard III (C) Suitability
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS
C. Suitability. 1. When Members and Candidates are in an advisory relationship with a client, they must: a. Make a reasonable inquiry into a client or prospective client's investment experience, risk and return objectives, and financial constraints prior to making any investment recommendation or taking investment action and must re-assess and update this information regularly. b. Determine that an investment is suitable to the client's financial situation and consistent with the client's written objectives, mandates, and constraints prior to making an investment recommendation or taking investment action. c. Judge the suitability of investments in the context of the client's total portfolio. 2. When Members and Candidates are responsible for managing a portfolio to a specific mandate, strategy, or style, they must only make investment recommendations or take investment actions that are consistent with the stated objectives and constraints of the portfolio. Members must always consider the appropriateness and suitability of the client's investment action and match this up against the needs and circumstances of the particular client in order to determine the suitability of the investment for the client. In the event that a new client is obtained or an existing client's previous investment matures, the member need not immediately obtain client information if he or she first re-invests these funds in some form of cash equivalent. The member will then obtain the client's investment preferences. He or she will need to determine from the client the level of risk that the client is prepared to accept (in other words, the client's risk tolerance level). This needs to be ascertained before any investment action is taken. You are required to:
You are NOT required to change an existing client portfolio as soon as it comes under your discretion; it is best to take a bit of time, plan and implement actions in an organized way. Procedures for compliance A written investment policy statement should be developed.
The investor's objectives and constraints should be maintained and reviewed periodically to reflect any changes in the client's circumstances. Annual review is reasonable unless business or other reasons dictate more or less frequent review. Example 1 After a five-minute interview, you advise a client how to invest a substantial proportion of her wealth. You have violated the "Know your customer" rule. You do not have adequate basis to make a detailed recommendation. Example 2 An analyst tells a client about the upside potential, without discussing the downside risks. He violates the standard because he should discuss the downside risks as well. Example 3 When recomm... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 10. Standard III (D) Performance Presentation
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS
D. Performance Presentation. When communicating investment performance information, Members and Candidates must make reasonable efforts to make sure that this information is fair, accurate, and complete. In the past there have been several practices that have hindered performance presentation and comparability, such as:
A firm cannot claim that they are/were in compliance with CFA Institute's standards unless they comply in all material respects with CFA Institute's standards. Procedures for compliance Misrepresentations about the investment performance of the firm can be avoided if the member maintains data about the firm's investments performance in written form and understands the classes of investments or accounts to which those data apply and the risks and limitations inherent in using such data. In analyzing information about the firm's investment performance, the member should ask the following questions:
Example Your bond fund has generated a below average performance for four of the past five years. You use this as the basis for expectations of an above-average performance for the upcoming year. If your average or expected performance is properly determined, you should have a 50% probability of meeting or exceeding that average. Thus, it is inappropriate to declare that because performance was below average last year it is likely to be above average next year. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 11. Standard III (E) Preservation of Confidentiality
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
III. DUTIES TO CLIENTS
E. Preservation of Confidentiality. Members and Candidates must keep information about current, former, and prospective clients confidential unless:
The analyst must preserve confidentiality when the following two criteria are met:
You are required to:
However, if the information concerns illegal activities by the client, the analyst may be required to consult with his supervisor and with legal counsel before deciding whether to report the activities to the appropriate governmental organization. Procedures for compliance The simplest, most conservative, and most effective way to comply with this standard is to avoid disclosing any information received from a client except to authorized fellow employees who are also working for the client. In some instances, however, a member may want to disclose information received from clients that is outside the scope of the confidential relationship and does not involve illegal activities. Before making such a disclosure, a member should ask the following questions:
Example 1 You work in the trust department of a large bank. A client tells you that she must sell a significant portion of her personal stock portfolio in order to generate cash to meet the payroll of her small business. Shortly after the meeting, a colleague in the commercial lending department of the bank mentions seeing you with the client. She has applied for a large business loan. He asks you if you have any information that could help the bank with the loan decision. You cannot disclose the content of your meeting with the client. If the colleague wants additional information, he should contact your client directly. Example 2 The employer of a client asks to meet with you. The employer suspects your client of embezzling funds from his place of work. You are aware that the client has made several substantial additions into his discretionary account during the past two months. It may be appropriate to provide information if it pertains to illegal activities. However, you are expected to preserve client confidentiality unless there is a clear indication of these activities. Contact your supervisor or legal counsel before providing information about your client. ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 12. Standard IV (A) Loyalty
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
IV. DUTIES TO EMPLOYERS
A. Loyalty. In materials related to their employment, Members and Candidates must act for the benefit of their employer and not deprive their employer of the advantage of their skills and abilities, divulge confidential information, or otherwise cause harm to their employer. Independent practice Members shall not undertake any independent practice that could result in compensation or other benefit in competition with their employer unless they obtain written consent from their employer.
If members and candidates plan to engage in independent business while still employed, they must provide a written statement to their employer describing the types of services, the expected duration, and the compensation. Note: Members have to participate in the activities. They do not actually have to receive any remuneration for this standard to apply. Leaving an employer Until their resignation becomes effective, members and candidates must continue to act in the employer's best interest, and must not engage in any activities that would conflict with this duty. A member can make preparations (but not undertake competitive business) to begin a competitive business as a departing employee, provided that the preparations do not breach the employee's duty of loyalty. Examples of this would be finding office space to rent for a member's future business. Nature of employment You can be exempt from the standard if you are an independent contractor. Definition of employee: someone in the service of another who has the power to control and direct the employee in the details of how work is to be done. An employee is not a contractor (you cannot control the details of how a contractor does a job). Employment relationship does not require written or implied contract or actual receipt of monetary compensation. Violations
Example 1 You agree to serve as an investment advisor to a non-profit institution run by a friend. Your firm provides similar services, but you elect to do this on your own for a very modest fee. Even if no fee was involved, you are obliged to obtain written consent from your employer. Example 2 An independent investment advisor is hired by a brokerage firm. However, she wants to keep her existing clients for herself. In this case, she must get the employer's written consent. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 13. Standard IV (B) Additional Compensation Arrangements
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
IV. DUTIES TO EMPLOYERS
B. Additional Compensation Arrangements. Members and Candidates must not accept gifts, benefits, compensation, or consideration that competes with, or might reasonably be expected to create a conflict of interest with, their employer's interests unless they obtain written consent from all parties involved. Outside compensation/benefits may affect loyalties and objectivity and create potential conflicts of interest. These include direct compensations from clients and indirect compensations or other benefits from third parties. Note: Accepting gifts is allowed, but you must inform your employer in writing before accepting. Procedures for compliance Members should make an immediate written report to their employer specifying any compensation they receive or propose to receive for services in addition to compensation or benefits received from their primary employer. Disclosure in writing means any form of communication that can be documented (e.g., email). This written report should state the terms of any oral or written agreement under which a member will receive additional compensation. Terms include the following:
Example 1 In an attempt to increase portfolio performance, a firm's client offers the portfolio manager an incentive, such as a free vacation. A conflict of interest exists in this case and the portfolio manager must inform the firm before accepting the arrangement. Example 2 One of your firm's clients manages a ski resort in Colorado. She has told you that as long as you are managing her assets, you are entitled to complimentary lift tickets at the resort. To be in compliance with this standard, you must report this in writing to your employer. The employer will want to ensure that this client receives no special consideration as a result of the arrangement. Example 3 Steve sits on the board of directors of ABC Inc. As a result, he obtains unlimited membership in ABC Inc.'s services. Steve does not disclose this relationship to his employer, because he does not receive monetary compensation. Steve has violated this standard by not disclosing the benefits he receives to his employer. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 14. Standard IV (C) Responsibilities of Supervisors
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
IV. DUTIES TO EMPLOYERS
C. Responsibilities of Supervisors. Members and Candidates must make reasonable efforts to detect and prevent violations of applicable laws, rules, regulations, and the Code and Standards by anyone subject to their supervision or authority. If you supervise large numbers of employees, you may not be able to evaluate the conduct of each employee. In this case, you may delegate supervisory duties; however, such delegation does not replace supervisory responsibilities. A supervisory member should rely on reasonable procedures to detect and prevent violations. The presence of a compliance policy manual and/or compliance department, however, does not remove his or her supervisory responsibilities. Procedures for compliance A supervisor complies with Standard IV (C) by identifying situations in which legal violations or violation of the Code and Standards are likely to occur, and establishing and enforcing compliance procedures to prevent such violations. If a firm does not have a compliance system, or the system is not adequate, members or candidates should decline in writing to accept supervisory responsibility until the firm adopts reasonable procedures to allow them to adequately exercise such responsibility. Adequate compliance procedures should:
Once a compliance program is in place, a supervisor should:
Once a violation is discovered, a supervisor should take the following actions:
If a supervisory member was unable to detect violations, he or she may not violate the standard if he or she takes steps to institute an effective compliance program AND adopts reasonable procedures to prevent and identify violations. Example 1 A supervisor in an investment management firm concludes that since all five equity analysts working for her are CFA charterholders, she can trust them to refrain from violations of laws, regulations, and the Code and Standards. While she can trust them to refrain from such violations, this does not constitute reasonable supervision. Example 2 You are offered a promotion to supervise all investment managers involved in discretionary trading. You are told that there have been instances of improper trading in some accounts and that at least one manager is likely performing additional investment services for several of his clients. However, the operation is highly profitable, so senior management has no immediate concern regarding these issues. You are responsible for prevention of violations of the Code and Standards. If there are known violations and little or no control over the investment process, you should decline ... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 15. Standard V (A) Diligence and Reasonable Basis
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
V. INVESTMENT ANALYSIS, RECOMMENDATIONS, AND ACTIONS
A. Diligence and Reasonable Basis. Members and Candidates must:
Members must perform the diligent and thorough investigations necessary to make an investment recommendation or to take investment action. Three factors determine the nature of the diligence, thoroughness of the research, and level of investigation required by the standard:
Members must establish a reasonable basis for all investment recommendations and actions. Diligence must be exercised to avoid any material misrepresentation. In other words, members cannot be quick or negligent in making investment recommendations. Example You are very excited about a small high-tech firm that is developing a new method of making Internet connections more efficient. You advise your clients to buy this security and tell them that a full report will be available shortly. Your recommendation is neither diligent nor thorough. You have not provided reasonable basis for the recommendation. It is impossible to distinguish between fact and opinion without further information. Using secondary or third-party research Secondary research: research conducted by someone else in the member or candidate's firm. Third-party research: research conducted by entities outside the member or candidate's firm. Members and candidates should check if research is sound. Examples of criteria include the assumptions used, the rigor of analysis, the timeliness of the research, and the objectivity and independence of recommendations. If the research is suspected to lack a sound basis, members and candidates should refrain from relying on it. Applications:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 16. Standard V (B) Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
V. INVESTMENT ANALYSIS, RECOMMENDATIONS, AND ACTIONS
B. Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients. Members and Candidates must:
All important factors relating to the investment recommendation must be included in the report. Members must include known limitations in the analysis and conclusions in the report and consider all risks associated with the investment. Members should consider including the following information in research reports:
A report can be given in many forms: a written report, in-person communication, telephone conversation, media broadcast, or transmission by computer (e.g., on the Internet or by email). Opinions should be distinguished clearly from facts. Specifically:
Procedures for compliance
Example 1 To simplify his report, an analyst leaves out details of the valuation models. He violates this standard because clients need to fully understand the analyst's process and logic in order to implement the recommendation. Example 2 An analyst issues a "buy" recommendation on a stock, mainly based on his optimistic assessment of the company's operation. He violates this standard by failing to distinguish between opinions and facts; his optimistic assessment of the company is his own opinion. Example 3 An analyst issues a report promoting a firm's new investment strategy. The report stresses the likelihood of high returns. However, it does not describe the strategy in detail. The analyst violates this standard because his report fails to describe properly the basic characteristics of the investment strategy. Example 4 An analyst has a duty to gather information about a company in o... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 17. Standard V (C) Record Retention
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
V. INVESTMENT ANALYSIS, RECOMMENDATIONS, AND ACTIONS
C. Record Retention. Members and Candidates must develop and maintain appropriate records to support their investment analysis, recommendations, actions, and other investment-related communications with clients and prospective clients. Members and candidates should maintain files to support investment recommendations. In addition to furnishing excellent reference materials for future work, research files play a key role in justifying investment decisions under later scrutiny. Files can serve as the ultimate proof that recommendations and actions, good or bad, were made based on the same methodology that drove the analyst's decisions.
Example If an analyst writes investment recommendations based on many sources, such as stock exchange data, interviews with senior management, onsite company visits, and other third party research, he or she should document and keep copies of all the information that goes into recommendations. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 18. Standard VI (A) Disclosure of Conflicts
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
VI. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
A. Disclosure of Conflicts. Members and Candidates must make full and fair disclosure of all maters that could reasonably be expected to impair their independence and objectivity or interfere with respective duties to their clients, prospective clients, and employers. Members and Candidates must ensure that such disclosures are prominent, are delivered in plain language, and communicate the relevant information effectively. Conflicts can occur between the interest of clients, the interests of employers, and the member's or candidate's own personal interest. In the investment industry, a conflict or the perception of a conflict often cannot be avoided and full disclosure is required. 1. Disclosure to Clients Members shall disclose to their clients and prospects all matters, including beneficial ownership of securities or other investments, that reasonably could be expected to impair the members' ability to make unbiased and objective recommendations. A member must disclose to clients/prospects the following conflicts:
The most obvious conflict that arises is when members own stocks in a company that they recommend to their clients.
Service as a director of another firm poses three possible conflicts:
Members should also disclose, with approval from their employers, special compensation arrangements with the employer that might conflict with clients' interests, such as bonuses based on short-term performance, commissions, performance fees, incentive fees, and referral fees. Procedures for compliance Many firms require employees and their families to report all transactions by employees and their families for purposes of detecting conflicts of interest and trading on material nonpublic information. Whether such requirements exist or not, members should report to employers, clients, and prospective clients any material beneficial interest they may have in securities and any corporate directorships or other special relationships they may have with the companies they are recommending. Members should make the disclosures before they make any recommendations or take any action regarding such investments. There are two approaches to avoid potential conflicts of interest:
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 19. Standard VI (B) Priority of Transactions
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
VI. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
B. Priority of Transactions. Investment transactions for clients and employers must have priority over investment transactions in which a Member or Candidate is the beneficial owner. This standard is designed to prevent any potential conflict of interest or even the appearance of a conflict of interest with respect to the analyst's personal transactions. Transactions for clients and employers shall have priority over transactions in securities or other investments in which a member is the beneficial owner so that such personal transactions do not operate adversely to clients' or employers' interests. If members make a recommendation regarding the purchase or sale of a security or other investment, they shall give their clients and employer adequate opportunity to act on their recommendations before acting on their own behalf. For purposes of the Code and Standards, a member is a "beneficial owner" if the member has:
This standard applies to all access persons. Personal transactions include those made for the member's own accounts, family accounts, and accounts in which the member has a direct or indirect pecuniary interest. Note that family accounts that are also client accounts should be treated like any other firm accounts. Neither special treatment nor disadvantage should be given to such accounts. Procedures for compliance Members should encourage their firms to prepare and distribute a Code of Ethics and compliance procedures, applicable to principals and employees, emphasizing their obligation to placing the interests of clients above personal and employer interests. The form and content of such compliance procedures depend on the size and nature of each organization and the laws to which it is subject. In general, however, the code and procedures should do the following:
Example 1 You receive a news release that a small firm in the industry that you follow has obtained a major contract with a multinational firm. The contract will doub... |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 20. Standard VI (C) Referral Fees
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
VI. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
C. Referral Fees. Members and Candidates must disclose to their employers, clients, and prospective clients, as appropriate, any compensation, consideration, or benefit received by or paid to others for the recommendation of products or services. Such disclosure should help the client evaluate any possible partiality shown in any recommendations of services as well as evaluate the full cost of services. Members and candidates are required to:
Example 1 You provide investment counseling on a fee-for-services basis. You encourage all of your clients to place trades through a particular broker: Richard Jones. You have known Mr. Jones for many years and feel that he is an excellent broker with fees and services that are competitive for the type of clients you typically work with. Mr. Jones also provides you with a "finder's fee" for each client you refer to him. Even if the services recommended are reasonable and appropriate, you must still disclose the referral fee. Example 2 ABC Firm has an agreement with XYZ Firm that ABC will recommend prospective pension clients to XYZ and in return XYZ will give ABC free research. ABC does not disclose the arrangement to prospective clients. ABC violates this standard for not disclosing the arrangement to prospective clients. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 21. Standard VII (A) Conduct as Members and Candidates in the CFA Program
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
VII. RESPONSIBILITIES AS A CFA INSTITUTE MEMBER OR CFA CANDIDATE
A. Conduct as Members and Candidates in the CFA Program. Members and Candidates must not engage in any conduct that compromises the reputation or integrity of CFA Institute or the CFA designation or the integrity, validity, or security of the CFA examinations. This standard applies to anyone who cheats, or helps other people to cheat, on the CFA examination or any other examination. Improperly using the CFA designation is also prohibited by this standard. Example Melissa White, CFA, runs her own investment advisory firm and serves as a proctor for the administration of the CFA examination in her city. She receives copies of the Level II CFA examination many days before the exam day. On the evening prior to the exam, she provides information concerning the examination questions to two stressed candidates whom are also her best-performing advisors. White and the two candidates violated the standard. Although it does not involve clients' money or an investment recommendation, White and the two members undermined the integrity and validity of the examination. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 22. Standard VII (B) Reference to CFA Institute, the CFA Designation, and the CFA Program
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-2-guidance-for-standards-i-vii
VII. RESPONSIBILITIES AS A CFA INSTITUTE MEMBER OR CFA CANDIDATE
B. Reference to CFA Institute, the CFA Designation, and the CFA Program. When referring to CFA Institute, CFA Institute membership, the CFA designation, or candidacy in the CFA Program, Members and Candidates must not misrepresent or exaggerate the meaning or implications of membership in CFA Institute, holding the CFA designation, or candidacy in the CFA Program. CFA Institute's members, CFA charterholders, and candidates in the CFA program must utilize their designation in the correct manner so as not to mislead the investing public. Since achievement of the CFA charter signifies a certain degree of knowledge, the public and clients expect a certain degree of knowledge when encountering the CFA designation. CFA Institute membership Requirements to be granted the right to use the CFA or Chartered Financial Analyst designation:
If a member fails to meet any of these requirement, he or she cannot claim him- or herself to be a member. Members should reference membership in a dignified and judicious manner; if necessary, this would include an accurate explanation of the requirements for obtaining membership. Using the Chartered Financial Analyst designation CFA charterholders may use the term "Chartered Financial Analyst" or "CFA" in a proper, dignified, and judicious manner (if necessary, with an accurate explanation of the requirements for obtaining the right to use the designation). Referencing candidacy in the CFA Program CFA candidates may reference their participation in the CFA Program, but the reference must clearly state that an individual is a CFA candidate and cannot imply that the candidate has achieved any type of partial designation.
About the CFA mark
Applications
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Why were the GIPS Standards Created?
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-3-introduction-to-gips
The financial markets and investment management industry has become increasingly global in nature. A common problem when reporting investment performance across different borders is that some countries have performance measurements and disclosures that are tailored specifically to them but that differ greatly from those in other countries. Some countries do not even have any standardized approaches for investment firms to follow to ensure fair representation and full disclosure of performance information.
In the past, making meaningful comparisons on the basis of accurate investment performance data was difficult because of some misleading practices, such as:
The GIPS standards lead investment management firms to avoid misrepresentations of performance and to communicate all relevant information that prospective clients should know in order to evaluate past results. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. Parties Affected by GIPS
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-3-introduction-to-gips
1. Firms
The GIPS standards apply primarily to investment management firms. The performance results of firms adopting GIPS will be more readily comparable. However, while firms are encouraged to adopt GIPS, the standards are voluntary. 2. CFA Institute's Members, CFA Charterholders, and CFA Candidates
3. Prospective and Current Clients
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. Composites
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-3-introduction-to-gips
A composite is defined as a group of portfolios that are managed with the same strategy or objective. Rather than presenting the performance of each individual portfolio, the firm can simply disclose the composite return of the portfolios as a group.
The determination of which portfolios to include in the composite should be done according to pre-established criteria (i.e., on an ex-ante basis), not after the fact. This prevents a firm from including only their best-performing portfolios in the composite. The composite return is the asset-weighted average of the performance results of all the portfolios in the composite. The following is not required for the Level I candidate but is provided as a reference only. Composite construction
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 4. Verification
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-3-introduction-to-gips
Verification refers to the independent review of a firm's performance measurement processes and procedures. Verification applies to the firm as a whole, not to individual composites.
Verification tests:
Again, the focus of verification is not on individual composites, but on the processes the firm follows to form composites and calculate and report performance. At this point, verification is not mandatory, but it is strongly recommended. Firms may claim compliance, but independently-verified compliance adds credibility to those claims. It is recommended that firms have all years for which they are claiming compliance verified. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 1. Introduction: The Vision Statement, Objectives and Key Characteristics of GIPS Standards
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-4-global-investment-performance-standards-gips
The overall purpose of GIPS is to provide guidelines for fair and full disclosure of investment performance. This will allow current and potential clients to properly interpret investment results over time and between firms.
There are four goals of GIPS:
In 1999, the Investment Performance Council (IPC) was created to provide an implementation structure for the GIPS standards. All countries are encouraged to adopt the GIPS standards as the common method for calculating and presenting investment performance. When applicable local or country-specific laws or regulations conflict with the GIPS standards, firms should comply with the GIPS standards in addition to those local requirements. As of January 2010, more than 32 countries had adopted or were in the process of adopting the GIPS standards. Now IPC is entering its second phase of the convergence strategy to the GIPS standards: to evolve the GIPS standards to incorporate local best practices from all regional standards. Vision Statement A global investment performance standard leads to readily accepted presentations of investment performance that
Objectives
Key Characteristics
|
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 2. The Scope of GIPS Standards with Respect to Definition of the Firm, Historical Performance Record, and Compliance
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-4-global-investment-performance-standards-gips
Definition of the Firm
It is intended that GIPS compliance be available to any firm. A firm must comply with GIPS on a firm-wide basis to claim compliance with the standards. All actual, fee-paying, discretionary portfolios managed by the firm must be included in the performance-measurement process. To be in compliance, an entity must state how it defines itself as a firm.
Historical Performance Record Firms should present their long-term performance records. To be in compliance, a firm must:
The goal is to have 10 years of GIPS-compliant performance results presented. To encourage firms to participate, GIPS only requires five years of data to initially come into compliance, allowing the full 10 years of performance results to be built over time. There is nothing to prevent a firm from initially presenting a full 10 years of compliance results. To maintain compliance, a firm presenting less than 10 years of performance results must increase the number of years of performance results presented. Claim of Compliance Which version of GIPS standards should firms comply with? The revised GIPS standards were adopted in 2010 and became effective on January 1, 2011. Although early adoption of these revised GIPS standards is encouraged, firms can still use the old version for performance presentations that include results through December 31, 2010. In order to claim compliance, a firm must meet ALL the requirements set forth in GIPS. Firms that fully comply with GIPS may use the following compliance statement in their performance presentations: "[Name of the firm] has prepared and presented this report in compliance with the Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS)." With regard to compliance, a firm is either in compliance or not in compliance. Firms may not make any claims to being "in compliance except for..." Appropriate disclosure when the GIPS standards and local regulations are in conflict: GIPS standards serve as minimum worldwide standards. If local laws are stricter than GIPS, local laws should be applied. If local laws don't exist or are less strict than the GIPS, the GIPS should apply. In cases of conflicts with GIPS, the standards require that local laws and regulations take precedence over GIPS. Firms should disclose any conflicts. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |
Subject 3. The Nine Major Sections of the GIPS Standards
#cfa #cfa-level-1 #ethical-and-professional-standards #reading-4-global-investment-performance-standards-gips
Following are the nine sections involved in GIPS. Each section has requirements and recommendations. All requirements must be met in order to be fully compliant with the GIPS. Firms are encouraged to adopt and implement the recommendations.
0. Fundamentals of Compliance. This section deals with firm definition, policies and procedures documentation, compliance claiming, and the fundamental responsibilities of a firm. The definition of a firm and claims of compliance have been covered in the last subject. Document Policies and Procedures Firms must document, in writing, the policies and procedures used in establishing and maintaining compliance with all the applicable requirements of the GIPS standards. Fundamental Responsibilities
1. Input Data. Input data requirements set standards for the collection of data necessary for calculating performance results that will be comparable across firms. For example, benchmarks and composites should be created / selected on an ex-ante basis, not after the fact. 2. Calculation Methodology. Achieving comparability among firms' performance presentations requires uniformity in the methods used to calculate returns. The standards mandate the use of certain calculation methodologies for both portfolios and composites. For example, total returns methodology is required for compliance. Total returns include realized and unrealized capital gains/losses, interest (accrued during a valuation period), and dividends paid (considered paid on the ex-date). 3. Composite Construction. Creating meaningful asset-weighted composites is critical to the fair presentation, consistency, and comparability of results over time and among firms. 4. Disclosure. Firms must disclose certain information about their performance presentations and policies adopted. Disclosures are considered to be static information that does not normally change from period to period. 5. Presentation and Reporting. After completing steps one to four, firms should incorporate this information in GIPS-compliant presentations. 6. Real Estate. This section applies to any real estate investment or management. It applies regardless of a firm's control over the management of the investment, its profitability, or its financing. 7. Private Equity. This section applies to all private equity investments other than open-end or evergreen funds. Private equity refers to any investment in nonpublic companies. Examples include venture investing, buy-out investing, mezzanine investing, fund-of-funds investing, secondary investing, etc. 8. Wrap Fee/ Separately Managed Account (SMA) Portfolios. This section applies to wrap fee/ SMA portfolios. A wrap fee is a comprehensive charge levied by an investment manager or investment advisor on a client for providing a bundle of services, such as investment advice, investment research, and brokerage services. |
status | not read | reprioritisations | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
last reprioritisation on | suggested re-reading day | |||
started reading on | finished reading on |